Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

WO2024186429A1 - Resolving ambiguity in cases of repeater-based positioning - Google Patents

Resolving ambiguity in cases of repeater-based positioning Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024186429A1
WO2024186429A1 PCT/US2024/014581 US2024014581W WO2024186429A1 WO 2024186429 A1 WO2024186429 A1 WO 2024186429A1 US 2024014581 W US2024014581 W US 2024014581W WO 2024186429 A1 WO2024186429 A1 WO 2024186429A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
prs
network node
instances
repeater
base station
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2024/014581
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Navid Abedini
Sony Akkarakaran
Original Assignee
Qualcomm Incorporated
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US18/432,644 external-priority patent/US20240306117A1/en
Application filed by Qualcomm Incorporated filed Critical Qualcomm Incorporated
Publication of WO2024186429A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024186429A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01SRADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S5/00Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
    • G01S5/0009Transmission of position information to remote stations
    • G01S5/0081Transmission between base stations
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01SRADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S5/00Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
    • G01S5/0009Transmission of position information to remote stations
    • G01S5/0018Transmission from mobile station to base station
    • G01S5/0036Transmission from mobile station to base station of measured values, i.e. measurement on mobile and position calculation on base station
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01SRADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S5/00Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
    • G01S5/02Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
    • G01S5/0273Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves using multipath or indirect path propagation signals in position determination
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/24Cell structures
    • H04W16/26Cell enhancers or enhancement, e.g. for tunnels, building shadow
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W64/00Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management

Definitions

  • aspects of the disclosure relate generally to wireless communications.
  • Wireless communication systems have developed through various generations, including a first-generation analog wireless phone service (1G), a second-generation (2G) digital wireless phone service (including interim 2.5G and 2.75G networks), a third-generation (3G) high speed data, Internet-capable wireless service and a fourth-generation (4G) service (e.g., Long Term Evolution (LTE) or WiMax).
  • a first-generation analog wireless phone service (1G) 1G
  • a second-generation (2G) digital wireless phone service including interim 2.5G and 2.75G networks
  • 3G third-generation
  • 4G fourth-generation
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • PCS personal communications service
  • Examples of known cellular systems include the cellular analog advanced mobile phone system (AMPS), and digital cellular systems based on code division multiple access (CDMA), frequency division multiple access (FDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), the Global System for Mobile communications (GSM), etc.
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • FDMA frequency division multiple access
  • TDMA time division multiple access
  • GSM
  • a fifth generation (5G) wireless standard referred to as New Radio (NR)
  • NR New Radio
  • the 5G standard according to the Next Generation Mobile Networks Alliance, is designed to provide higher data rates as compared to previous standards, more accurate positioning (e.g., based on reference signals for positioning (RS-P), such as downlink, uplink, or sidelink positioning reference signals (PRS)), and other technical enhancements.
  • RS-P reference signals for positioning
  • PRS sidelink positioning reference signals
  • a method of communication performed by a location server includes transmitting, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and receiving, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
  • PRS positioning reference signal
  • a method of communication performed by a location server includes transmitting, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and transmitting, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
  • PRS positioning reference signal
  • a method of communication performed by a network node includes configuring a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; attempting to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; attempting to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
  • UE user equipment
  • a method of communication performed by a network node includes configuring a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; receiving one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
  • UE user equipment
  • a location server includes one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and receive, via the one or more transceivers, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position
  • UE user equipment
  • a location server includes one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
  • PRS positioning reference signal
  • a network node includes one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: configure a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; attempt to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; attempt to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were
  • a network node includes one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: configure a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; receive, via the one or more transceivers, one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a user equipment (UE) to
  • a location server includes means for transmitting, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of timedomain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and means for receiving, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
  • PRS positioning reference signal
  • a location server includes means for transmitting, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and means for transmitting, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
  • PRS positioning reference signal
  • a network node includes means for configuring a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; means for configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; means for attempting to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; means for attempting to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and means for transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
  • UE user equipment
  • a network node includes means for configuring a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; means for configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; means for receiving one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and means for transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
  • UE user equipment
  • a non-transitory computer-readable medium stores computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a location server, cause the location server to: transmit, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and receive, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
  • PRS positioning reference signal
  • a non-transitory computer-readable medium stores computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a location server, cause the location server to: transmit, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and transmit, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
  • PRS positioning reference signal
  • a non-transitory computer-readable medium stores computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a network node, cause the network node to: configure a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; attempt to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; attempt to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and transmit, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
  • UE user equipment
  • a non-transitory computer-readable medium stores computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a network node, cause the network node to: configure a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; receive one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and transmit, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained
  • FIG. 1 illustrates an example wireless communications system, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • FIGS. 2 A, 2B, and 2C illustrate example wireless network structures, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • FIGS. 3A, 3B, and 3C are simplified block diagrams of several sample aspects of components that may be employed in a user equipment (UE), a base station, and a network entity, respectively, and configured to support communications as taught herein.
  • UE user equipment
  • base station base station
  • network entity network entity
  • FIG. 4 illustrates examples of various positioning methods supported in New Radio (NR), according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example frame structure, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example downlink positioning reference signal (DL- PRS) configuration for two transmission-reception points (TRPs) operating in the same positioning frequency layer, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • DL- PRS downlink positioning reference signal
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram of an example positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for the PRS transmissions of a given base station, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • PRS positioning reference signal
  • FIGS. 8 A to 8D illustrate the differences between a repeater function and a relay function.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example wireless environment in which a base station is transmitting PRS to UEs in various geographical areas, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example wireless environment in which a base station is beam sweeping PRS resources to multiple UEs, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates example uplink enhanced cell identity (E-CID) measurement procedures between a next generation radio access network (NG-RAN) node and a location management function (LMF), according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • E-CID uplink enhanced cell identity
  • FIGS. 12 to 15 illustrate example methods of communication, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • a location server may transmit, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for multiple PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node.
  • the configuration indicates that a first set of the PRS resources are to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of the PRS resources are to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources towards a repeater.
  • the network node transmits the PRS resources as configured, and at least one user equipment (UE) measures the PRS resources and transmits a measurement report to the location server.
  • the location server can then determine whether the at least one UE is within a coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report.
  • UE user equipment
  • a location server may configure a network node as a donor network node to a repeater. Specifically, the location server may transmit, to the network node, a message configuring the network node to be a donor network node for a repeater. The location server may also transmit, to the network node, a PRS configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the network node towards the repeater.
  • a network node may determine whether a UE is within a coverage area of a repeater. Specifically, the network node may configure the UE to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances. The network node may also configure the repeater with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances. The network node then attempts to measure a first subset of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater and a second subset of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater.
  • the network node can then determine whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater based on whether measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
  • Particular aspects of the subject matter described in this disclosure can be implemented to realize one or more of the following potential advantages. In some examples, by determining whether a UE is within a coverage area of a repeater, the described techniques can be used to provide appropriate positioning configurations to the involved network node(s) and the UE.
  • sequences of actions are described in terms of sequences of actions to be performed by, for example, elements of a computing device. It will be recognized that various actions described herein can be performed by specific circuits (e.g., application specific integrated circuits (ASICs)), by program instructions being executed by one or more processors, or by a combination of both. Additionally, the sequence(s) of actions described herein can be considered to be embodied entirely within any form of non- transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored therein a corresponding set of computer instructions that, upon execution, would cause or instruct an associated processor of a device to perform the functionality described herein.
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • a UE may be any wireless communication device (e.g., a mobile phone, router, tablet computer, laptop computer, consumer asset locating device, wearable (e.g., smartwatch, glasses, augmented reality (AR) / virtual reality (VR) headset, etc.), vehicle (e.g., automobile, motorcycle, bicycle, etc.), Internet of Things (loT) device, etc.) used by a user to communicate over a wireless communications network.
  • a UE may be mobile or may (e.g., at certain times) be stationary, and may communicate with a radio access network (RAN).
  • RAN radio access network
  • the term “UE” may be referred to interchangeably as an “access terminal” or “AT,” a “client device,” a “wireless device,” a “subscriber device,” a “subscriber terminal,” a “subscriber station,” a “user terminal” or “UT,” a “mobile device,” a “mobile terminal,” a “mobile station,” or variations thereof.
  • AT access terminal
  • client device a “wireless device”
  • subscriber device a “subscriber terminal”
  • a “subscriber station” a “user terminal” or “UT”
  • UEs can communicate with a core network via a RAN, and through the core network the UEs can be connected with external networks such as the Internet and with other UEs.
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
  • a base station may operate according to one of several RATs in communication with UEs depending on the network in which it is deployed, and may be alternatively referred to as an access point (AP), a network node, a NodeB, an evolved NodeB (eNB), a next generation eNB (ng-eNB), a New Radio (NR) Node B (also referred to as a gNB or gNodeB), etc.
  • AP access point
  • eNB evolved NodeB
  • ng-eNB next generation eNB
  • NR New Radio
  • a base station may be used primarily to support wireless access by UEs, including supporting data, voice, and/or signaling connections for the supported UEs.
  • a base station may provide purely edge node signaling functions while in other systems it may provide additional control and/or network management functions.
  • a communication link through which UEs can send signals to a base station is called an uplink (UL) channel (e.g., a reverse traffic channel, a reverse control channel, an access channel, etc.).
  • a communication link through which the base station can send signals to UEs is called a downlink (DL) or forward link channel (e.g., a paging channel, a control channel, a broadcast channel, a forward traffic channel, etc.).
  • DL downlink
  • forward link channel e.g., a paging channel, a control channel, a broadcast channel, a forward traffic channel, etc.
  • traffic channel can refer to either an uplink / reverse or downlink / forward traffic channel.
  • the term “base station” may refer to a single physical transmission-reception point (TRP) or to multiple physical TRPs that may or may not be co-located.
  • the physical TRP may be an antenna of the base station corresponding to a cell (or several cell sectors) of the base station.
  • the physical TRPs may be an array of antennas (e.g., as in a multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) system or where the base station employs beamforming) of the base station.
  • MIMO multiple-input multiple-output
  • the physical TRPs may be a distributed antenna system (DAS) (a network of spatially separated antennas connected to a common source via a transport medium) or a remote radio head (RRH) (a remote base station connected to a serving base station).
  • DAS distributed antenna system
  • RRH remote radio head
  • the non-co-located physical TRPs may be the serving base station receiving the measurement report from the UE and a neighbor base station whose reference radio frequency (RF) signals the UE is measuring.
  • RF radio frequency
  • a base station may not support wireless access by UEs (e.g., may not support data, voice, and/or signaling connections for UEs), but may instead transmit reference signals to UEs to be measured by the UEs, and/or may receive and measure signals transmitted by the UEs.
  • a base station may be referred to as a positioning beacon (e.g., when transmitting signals to UEs) and/or as a location measurement unit (e.g., when receiving and measuring signals from UEs).
  • An “RF signal” comprises an electromagnetic wave of a given frequency that transports information through the space between a transmitter and a receiver.
  • a transmitter may transmit a single “RF signal” or multiple “RF signals” to a receiver.
  • the receiver may receive multiple “RF signals” corresponding to each transmitted RF signal due to the propagation characteristics of RF signals through multipath channels.
  • the same transmitted RF signal on different paths between the transmitter and receiver may be referred to as a “multipath” RF signal.
  • an RF signal may also be referred to as a “wireless signal” or simply a “signal” where it is clear from the context that the term “signal” refers to a wireless signal or an RF signal.
  • the wireless communications system 100 may include various base stations 102 (labeled “BS”) and various UEs 104.
  • the base stations 102 may include macro cell base stations (high power cellular base stations) and/or small cell base stations (low power cellular base stations).
  • the macro cell base stations may include eNBs and/or ng-eNBs where the wireless communications system 100 corresponds to an LTE network, or gNBs where the wireless communications system 100 corresponds to a NR network, or a combination of both, and the small cell base stations may include femtocells, picocells, microcells, etc.
  • the base stations 102 may collectively form a RAN and interface with a core network 170 (e.g., an evolved packet core (EPC) or a 5G core (5GC)) through backhaul links 122, and through the core network 170 to one or more location servers 172 (e.g., a location management function (LMF) or a secure user plane location (SUPL) location platform (SLP)).
  • the location server(s) 172 may be part of core network 170 or may be external to core network 170.
  • a location server 172 may be integrated with a base station 102.
  • a UE 104 may communicate with a location server 172 directly or indirectly.
  • a UE 104 may communicate with a location server 172 via the base station 102 that is currently serving that UE 104.
  • a UE 104 may also communicate with a location server 172 through another path, such as via an application server (not shown), via another network, such as via a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) (e.g., AP 150 described below), and so on.
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • AP access point
  • communication between a UE 104 and a location server 172 may be represented as an indirect connection (e.g., through the core network 170, etc.) or a direct connection (e.g., as shown via direct connection 128), with the intervening nodes (if any) omitted from a signaling diagram for clarity.
  • the base stations 102 may perform functions that relate to one or more of transferring user data, radio channel ciphering and deciphering, integrity protection, header compression, mobility control functions (e.g., handover, dual connectivity), inter-cell interference coordination, connection setup and release, load balancing, distribution for non-access stratum (NAS) messages, NAS node selection, synchronization, RAN sharing, multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS), subscriber and equipment trace, RAN information management (RIM), paging, positioning, and delivery of warning messages.
  • the base stations 102 may communicate with each other directly or indirectly (e.g., through the EPC / 5GC) over backhaul links 134, which may be wired or wireless.
  • the base stations 102 may wirelessly communicate with the UEs 104. Each of the base stations 102 may provide communication coverage for a respective geographic coverage area 110. In an aspect, one or more cells may be supported by a base station 102 in each geographic coverage area 110.
  • a “cell” is a logical communication entity used for communication with a base station (e.g., over some frequency resource, referred to as a carrier frequency, component carrier, carrier, band, or the like), and may be associated with an identifier (e.g., a physical cell identifier (PCI), an enhanced cell identifier (ECI), a virtual cell identifier (VCI), a cell global identifier (CGI), etc.) for distinguishing cells operating via the same or a different carrier frequency.
  • PCI physical cell identifier
  • ECI enhanced cell identifier
  • VCI virtual cell identifier
  • CGI cell global identifier
  • different cells may be configured according to different protocol types (e.g., machine-type communication (MTC), narrowband loT (NB-IoT), enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB), or others) that may provide access for different types of UEs.
  • MTC machine-type communication
  • NB-IoT narrowband loT
  • eMBB enhanced mobile broadband
  • a cell may refer to either or both of the logical communication entity and the base station that supports it, depending on the context.
  • TRP is typically the physical transmission point of a cell
  • the terms “cell” and “TRP” may be used interchangeably.
  • the term “cell” may also refer to a geographic coverage area of a base station (e.g., a sector), insofar as a carrier frequency can be detected and used for communication within some portion of geographic coverage areas 110.
  • While neighboring macro cell base station 102 geographic coverage areas 110 may partially overlap (e.g., in a handover region), some of the geographic coverage areas 110 may be substantially overlapped by a larger geographic coverage area 110.
  • a small cell base station 102' (labeled “SC” for “small cell”) may have a geographic coverage area 110' that substantially overlaps with the geographic coverage area 110 of one or more macro cell base stations 102.
  • a network that includes both small cell and macro cell base stations may be known as a heterogeneous network.
  • a heterogeneous network may also include home eNBs (HeNBs), which may provide service to a restricted group known as a closed subscriber group (CSG).
  • HeNBs home eNBs
  • CSG closed subscriber group
  • the communication links 120 between the base stations 102 and the UEs 104 may include uplink (also referred to as reverse link) transmissions from a UE 104 to a base station 102 and/or downlink (DL) (also referred to as forward link) transmissions from a base station 102 to a UE 104.
  • the communication links 120 may use MIMO antenna technology, including spatial multiplexing, beamforming, and/or transmit diversity.
  • the communication links 120 may be through one or more carrier frequencies. Allocation of carriers may be asymmetric with respect to downlink and uplink (e.g., more or less carriers may be allocated for downlink than for uplink).
  • the wireless communications system 100 may further include a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) 150 in communication with WLAN stations (STAs) 152 via communication links 154 in an unlicensed frequency spectrum (e.g., 5 GHz).
  • WLAN STAs 152 and/or the WLAN AP 150 may perform a clear channel assessment (CCA) or listen before talk (LBT) procedure prior to communicating in order to determine whether the channel is available.
  • CCA clear channel assessment
  • LBT listen before talk
  • the small cell base station 102' may operate in a licensed and/or an unlicensed frequency spectrum. When operating in an unlicensed frequency spectrum, the small cell base station 102' may employ LTE or NR technology and use the same 5 GHz unlicensed frequency spectrum as used by the WLAN AP 150. The small cell base station 102', employing LTE / 5G in an unlicensed frequency spectrum, may boost coverage to and/or increase capacity of the access network.
  • NR in unlicensed spectrum may be referred to as NR-U.
  • LTE in an unlicensed spectrum may be referred to as LTE-U, licensed assisted access (LAA), or MulteFire.
  • the wireless communications system 100 may further include a millimeter wave (mmW) base station 180 that may operate in mmW frequencies and/or near mmW frequencies in communication with a UE 182.
  • Extremely high frequency (EHF) is part of the RF in the electromagnetic spectrum. EHF has a range of 30 GHz to 300 GHz and a wavelength between 1 millimeter and 10 millimeters. Radio waves in this band may be referred to as a millimeter wave.
  • Near mmW may extend down to a frequency of 3 GHz with a wavelength of 100 millimeters.
  • the super high frequency (SHF) band extends between 3 GHz and 30 GHz, also referred to as centimeter wave.
  • the mmW base station 180 and the UE 182 may utilize beamforming (transmit and/or receive) over a mmW communication link 184 to compensate for the extremely high path loss and short range.
  • one or more base stations 102 may also transmit using mmW or near mmW and beamforming. Accordingly, it will be appreciated that the foregoing illustrations are merely examples and should not be construed to limit the various aspects disclosed herein.
  • Transmit beamforming is a technique for focusing an RF signal in a specific direction.
  • a network node e.g., a base station
  • broadcasts an RF signal it broadcasts the signal in all directions (omni-directionally).
  • the network node determines where a given target device (e.g., a UE) is located (relative to the transmitting network node) and projects a stronger downlink RF signal in that specific direction, thereby providing a faster (in terms of data rate) and stronger RF signal for the receiving device(s).
  • a network node can control the phase and relative amplitude of the RF signal at each of the one or more transmitters that are broadcasting the RF signal.
  • a network node may use an array of antennas (referred to as a “phased array” or an “antenna array”) that creates a beam of RF waves that can be “steered” to point in different directions, without actually moving the antennas.
  • the RF current from the transmitter is fed to the individual antennas with the correct phase relationship so that the radio waves from the separate antennas add together to increase the radiation in a desired direction, while cancelling to suppress radiation in undesired directions.
  • Transmit beams may be quasi-co-located, meaning that they appear to the receiver (e.g., a UE) as having the same parameters, regardless of whether or not the transmitting antennas of the network node themselves are physically co-located.
  • the receiver e.g., a UE
  • QCL relation of a given type means that certain parameters about a second reference RF signal on a second beam can be derived from information about a source reference RF signal on a source beam.
  • the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel.
  • the source reference RF signal is QCL Type B
  • the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the Doppler shift and Doppler spread of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel.
  • the source reference RF signal is QCL Type C
  • the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the Doppler shift and average delay of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel.
  • the source reference RF signal is QCL Type D
  • the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the spatial receive parameter of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel.
  • the receiver uses a receive beam to amplify RF signals detected on a given channel.
  • the receiver can increase the gain setting and/or adjust the phase setting of an array of antennas in a particular direction to amplify (e.g., to increase the gain level of) the RF signals received from that direction.
  • a receiver is said to beamform in a certain direction, it means the beam gain in that direction is high relative to the beam gain along other directions, or the beam gain in that direction is the highest compared to the beam gain in that direction of all other receive beams available to the receiver. This results in a stronger received signal strength (e.g., reference signal received power (RSRP), reference signal received quality (RSRQ), signal -to- interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR), etc.) of the RF signals received from that direction.
  • RSRP reference signal received power
  • RSRQ reference signal received quality
  • SINR signal -to- interference-plus-noise ratio
  • Transmit and receive beams may be spatially related.
  • a spatial relation means that parameters for a second beam (e.g., a transmit or receive beam) for a second reference signal can be derived from information about a first beam (e.g., a receive beam or a transmit beam) for a first reference signal.
  • a UE may use a particular receive beam to receive a reference downlink reference signal (e.g., synchronization signal block (SSB)) from a base station.
  • the UE can then form a transmit beam for sending an uplink reference signal (e.g., sounding reference signal (SRS)) to that base station based on the parameters of the receive beam.
  • an uplink reference signal e.g., sounding reference signal (SRS)
  • a “downlink” beam may be either a transmit beam or a receive beam, depending on the entity forming it. For example, if a base station is forming the downlink beam to transmit a reference signal to a UE, the downlink beam is a transmit beam. If the UE is forming the downlink beam, however, it is a receive beam to receive the downlink reference signal.
  • an “uplink” beam may be either a transmit beam or a receive beam, depending on the entity forming it. For example, if a base station is forming the uplink beam, it is an uplink receive beam, and if a UE is forming the uplink beam, it is an uplink transmit beam.
  • FR1 frequency range designations FR1 (410 MHz - 7.125 GHz) and FR2 (24.25 GHz - 52.6 GHz). It should be understood that although a portion of FR1 is greater than 6 GHz, FR1 is often referred to (interchangeably) as a “Sub-6 GHz” band in various documents and articles.
  • FR2 which is often referred to (interchangeably) as a “millimeter wave” band in documents and articles, despite being different from the extremely high frequency (EHF) band (30 GHz - 300 GHz) which is identified by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU) as a “millimeter wave” band.
  • EHF extremely high frequency
  • ITU International Telecommunications Union
  • FR3 7.125 GHz - 24.25 GHz
  • FR3 7.125 GHz - 24.25 GHz
  • Frequency bands falling within FR3 may inherit FR1 characteristics and/or FR2 characteristics, and thus may effectively extend features of FR1 and/or FR2 into mid-band frequencies.
  • higher frequency bands are currently being explored to extend 5G NR operation beyond 52.6 GHz.
  • FR4a or FR4-1 52.6 GHz - 71 GHz
  • FR4 52.6 GHz - 114.25 GHz
  • FR5 114.25 GHz - 300 GHz.
  • Each of these higher frequency bands falls within the EHF band.
  • sub-6 GHz or the like if used herein may broadly represent frequencies that may be less than 6 GHz, may be within FR1, or may include mid-band frequencies.
  • millimeter wave or the like if used herein may broadly represent frequencies that may include mid-band frequencies, may be within FR2, FR4, FR4-a or FR4-1, and/or FR5, or may be within the EHF band.
  • the anchor carrier is the carrier operating on the primary frequency (e.g., FR1) utilized by a UE 104/182 and the cell in which the UE 104/182 either performs the initial radio resource control (RRC) connection establishment procedure or initiates the RRC connection re-establishment procedure.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the primary carrier carries all common and UE-specific control channels, and may be a carrier in a licensed frequency (however, this is not always the case).
  • a secondary carrier is a carrier operating on a second frequency (e.g., FR2) that may be configured once the RRC connection is established between the UE 104 and the anchor carrier and that may be used to provide additional radio resources.
  • the secondary carrier may be a carrier in an unlicensed frequency.
  • the secondary carrier may contain only necessary signaling information and signals, for example, those that are UE-specific may not be present in the secondary carrier, since both primary uplink and downlink carriers are typically UE-specific. This means that different UEs 104/182 in a cell may have different downlink primary carriers. The same is true for the uplink primary carriers.
  • the network is able to change the primary carrier of any UE 104/182 at any time. This is done, for example, to balance the load on different carriers. Because a “serving cell” (whether a PCell or an SCell) corresponds to a carrier frequency / component carrier over which some base station is communicating, the term “cell,” “serving cell,” “component carrier,” “carrier frequency,” and the like can be used interchangeably.
  • one of the frequencies utilized by the macro cell base stations 102 may be an anchor carrier (or “PCell”) and other frequencies utilized by the macro cell base stations 102 and/or the mmW base station 180 may be secondary carriers (“SCells”).
  • PCell anchor carrier
  • SCells secondary carriers
  • the simultaneous transmission and/or reception of multiple carriers enables the UE 104/182 to significantly increase its data transmission and/or reception rates.
  • two 20 MHz aggregated carriers in a multi-carrier system would theoretically lead to a two-fold increase in data rate (i.e., 40 MHz), compared to that attained by a single 20 MHz carrier.
  • the wireless communications system 100 may further include a UE 164 that may communicate with a macro cell base station 102 over a communication link 120 and/or the mmW base station 180 over a mmW communication link 184.
  • the macro cell base station 102 may support a PCell and one or more SCells for the UE 164 and the mmW base station 180 may support one or more SCells for the UE 164.
  • the UE 164 and the UE 182 may be capable of sidelink communication.
  • Sidelink-capable UEs may communicate with base stations 102 over communication links 120 using the Uu interface (i.e., the air interface between a UE and abase station).
  • SL-UEs e.g., UE 164, UE 182
  • a wireless sidelink (or just “sidelink”) is an adaptation of the core cellular (e.g., LTE, NR) standard that allows direct communication between two or more UEs without the communication needing to go through a base station.
  • Sidelink communication may be unicast or multicast, and may be used for device-to-device (D2D) media-sharing, vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication, vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication (e.g., cellular V2X (cV2X) communication, enhanced V2X (eV2X) communication, etc.), emergency rescue applications, etc.
  • V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • cV2X cellular V2X
  • eV2X enhanced V2X
  • One or more of a group of SL- UEs utilizing sidelink communications may be within the geographic coverage area 110 of a base station 102.
  • Other SL-UEs in such a group may be outside the geographic coverage area 110 of a base station 102 or be otherwise unable to receive transmissions from a base station 102.
  • groups of SL-UEs communicating via sidelink communications may utilize a one-to-many (1 :M) system in which each SL-UE transmits to every other SL-UE in the group.
  • a base station 102 facilitates the scheduling of resources for sidelink communications.
  • sidelink communications are carried out between SL-UEs without the involvement of a base station 102.
  • the sidelink 160 may operate over a wireless communication medium of interest, which may be shared with other wireless communications between other vehicles and/or infrastructure access points, as well as other RATs.
  • a “medium” may be composed of one or more time, frequency, and/or space communication resources (e.g., encompassing one or more channels across one or more carriers) associated with wireless communication between one or more transmitter / receiver pairs.
  • the medium of interest may correspond to at least a portion of an unlicensed frequency band shared among various RATs.
  • FIG. 1 only illustrates two of the UEs as SL-UEs (i.e., UEs 164 and 182), any of the illustrated UEs may be SL-UEs.
  • UE 182 was described as being capable of beamforming, any of the illustrated UEs, including UE 164, may be capable of beamforming.
  • SL-UEs are capable of beamforming, they may beamform towards each other (i.e., towards other SL-UEs), towards other UEs (e.g., UEs 104), towards base stations (e.g., base stations 102, 180, small cell 102’, access point 150), etc.
  • UEs 164 and 182 may utilize beamforming over sidelink 160.
  • any of the illustrated UEs may receive signals 124 from one or more Earth orbiting space vehicles (SVs) 112 (e.g., satellites).
  • the S Vs 112 may be part of a satellite positioning system that aUE 104 can use as an independent source of location information.
  • a satellite positioning system typically includes a system of transmitters (e.g., SVs 112) positioned to enable receivers (e.g., UEs 104) to determine their location on or above the Earth based, at least in part, on positioning signals (e.g., signals 124) received from the transmitters.
  • Such a transmitter typically transmits a signal marked with a repeating pseudo-random noise (PN) code of a set number of chips. While typically located in SVs 112, transmitters may sometimes be located on ground-based control stations, base stations 102, and/or other UEs 104.
  • a UE 104 may include one or more dedicated receivers specifically designed to receive signals 124 for deriving geo location information from the SVs 112.
  • a satellite positioning system the use of signals 124 can be augmented by various satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS) that may be associated with or otherwise enabled for use with one or more global and/or regional navigation satellite systems.
  • SBAS satellite-based augmentation systems
  • an SBAS may include an augmentation system(s) that provides integrity information, differential corrections, etc., such as the Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS), the European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS), the Multifunctional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS), the Global Positioning System (GPS) Aided Geo Augmented Navigation or GPS and Geo Augmented Navigation system (GAGAN), and/or the like.
  • WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System
  • GNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service
  • MSAS Multifunctional Satellite Augmentation System
  • GPS Global Positioning System Aided Geo Augmented Navigation or GPS and Geo Augmented Navigation system
  • GAN Global Positioning System
  • a satellite positioning system may include any combination of one or more global and/or regional navigation satellites associated with such one or
  • SVs 112 may additionally or alternatively be part of one or more nonterrestrial networks (NTNs).
  • NTN nonterrestrial networks
  • an SV 112 is connected to an earth station (also referred to as a ground station, NTN gateway, or gateway), which in turn is connected to an element in a 5G network, such as a modified base station 102 (without a terrestrial antenna) or a network node in a 5GC.
  • This element would in turn provide access to other elements in the 5G network and ultimately to entities external to the 5G network, such as Internet web servers and other user devices.
  • a UE 104 may receive communication signals (e.g., signals 124) from an SV 112 instead of, or in addition to, communication signals from a terrestrial base station 102.
  • the wireless communications system 100 may further include one or more UEs, such as UE 190, that connects indirectly to one or more communication networks via one or more device-to-device (D2D) peer-to-peer (P2P) links (referred to as “sidelinks”).
  • D2D device-to-device
  • P2P peer-to-peer
  • UE 190 has a D2D P2P link 192 with one of the UEs 104 connected to one of the base stations 102 (e.g., through which UE 190 may indirectly obtain cellular connectivity) and a D2D P2P link 194 with WLAN STA 152 connected to the WLAN AP 150 (through which UE 190 may indirectly obtain WLAN-based Internet connectivity).
  • the D2D P2P links 192 and 194 may be supported with any well-known D2D RAT, such as LTE Direct (LTE-D), WiFi Direct (WiFi-D), Bluetooth®, and so on.
  • FIG. 2A illustrates an example wireless network structure 200.
  • a 5GC 210 also referred to as a Next Generation Core (NGC)
  • C-plane control plane
  • U-plane user plane
  • User plane interface (NG-U) 213 and control plane interface (NG-C) 215 connect the gNB 222 to the 5GC 210 and specifically to the user plane functions 212 and control plane functions 214, respectively.
  • an ng-eNB 224 may also be connected to the 5GC 210 via NG-C 215 to the control plane functions 214 and NG-U 213 to user plane functions 212. Further, ng-eNB 224 may directly communicate with gNB 222 via a backhaul connection 223.
  • a Next Generation RAN (NG-RAN) 220 may have one or more gNBs 222, while other configurations include one or more of both ng-eNBs 224 and gNBs 222. Either (or both) gNB 222 or ng-eNB 224 may communicate with one or more UEs 204 (e.g., any of the UEs described herein).
  • a location server 230 which may be in communication with the 5GC 210 to provide location assistance for UE(s) 204.
  • the location server 230 can be implemented as a plurality of separate servers (e.g., physically separate servers, different software modules on a single server, different software modules spread across multiple physical servers, etc.), or alternately may each correspond to a single server.
  • the location server 230 can be configured to support one or more location services for UEs 204 that can connect to the location server 230 via the core network, 5GC 210, and/or via the Internet (not illustrated). Further, the location server 230 may be integrated into a component of the core network, or alternatively may be external to the core network (e.g., a third party server, such as an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) server or service server).
  • OEM original equipment manufacturer
  • FIG. 2B illustrates another example wireless network structure 240.
  • a 5GC 260 (which may correspond to 5GC 210 in FIG. 2A) can be viewed functionally as control plane functions, provided by an access and mobility management function (AMF) 264, and user plane functions, provided by a user plane function (UPF) 262, which operate cooperatively to form the core network (i.e., 5GC 260).
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • UPF user plane function
  • the functions of the AMF 264 include registration management, connection management, reachability management, mobility management, lawful interception, transport for session management (SM) messages between one or more UEs 204 (e.g., any of the UEs described herein) and a session management function (SMF) 266, transparent proxy services for routing SM messages, access authentication and access authorization, transport for short message service (SMS) messages between the UE 204 and the short message service function (SMSF) (not shown), and security anchor functionality (SEAF).
  • the AMF 264 also interacts with an authentication server function (AUSF) (not shown) and the UE 204, and receives the intermediate key that was established as a result of the UE 204 authentication process.
  • AUSF authentication server function
  • the AMF 264 retrieves the security material from the AUSF.
  • the functions of the AMF 264 also include security context management (SCM).
  • SCM receives a key from the SEAF that it uses to derive access-network specific keys.
  • the functionality of the AMF 264 also includes location services management for regulatory services, transport for location services messages between the UE 204 and a location management function (LMF) 270 (which acts as a location server 230), transport for location services messages between the NG-RAN 220 and the LMF 270, evolved packet system (EPS) bearer identifier allocation for interworking with the EPS, and UE 204 mobility event notification.
  • LMF location management function
  • EPS evolved packet system
  • the AMF 264 also supports functionalities for non-3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project) access networks.
  • Functions of the UPF 262 include acting as an anchor point for intra-/inter-RAT mobility (when applicable), acting as an external protocol data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect to a data network (not shown), providing packet routing and forwarding, packet inspection, user plane policy rule enforcement (e.g., gating, redirection, traffic steering), lawful interception (user plane collection), traffic usage reporting, quality of service (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g., uplink/ downlink rate enforcement, reflective QoS marking in the downlink), uplink traffic verification (service data flow (SDF) to QoS flow mapping), transport level packet marking in the uplink and downlink, downlink packet buffering and downlink data notification triggering, and sending and forwarding of one or more “end markers” to the source RAN node.
  • the UPF 262 may also support transfer of location services messages over a user plane between the UE 204 and a location server, such as an SLP 272.
  • the functions of the SMF 266 include session management, UE Internet protocol (IP) address allocation and management, selection and control of user plane functions, configuration of traffic steering at the UPF 262 to route traffic to the proper destination, control of part of policy enforcement and QoS, and downlink data notification.
  • IP Internet protocol
  • the interface over which the SMF 266 communicates with the AMF 264 is referred to as the Ni l interface.
  • Another optional aspect may include an LMF 270, which may be in communication with the 5GC 260 to provide location assistance for UEs 204.
  • the LMF 270 can be implemented as a plurality of separate servers (e.g., physically separate servers, different software modules on a single server, different software modules spread across multiple physical servers, etc.), or alternately may each correspond to a single server.
  • the LMF 270 can be configured to support one or more location services for UEs 204 that can connect to the LMF 270 via the core network, 5GC 260, and/or via the Internet (not illustrated).
  • the SLP 272 may support similar functions to the LMF 270, but whereas the LMF 270 may communicate with the AMF 264, NG-RAN 220, and UEs 204 over a control plane (e.g., using interfaces and protocols intended to convey signaling messages and not voice or data), the SLP 272 may communicate with UEs 204 and external clients (e.g., third-party server 274) over a user plane (e.g., using protocols intended to carry voice and/or data like the transmission control protocol (TCP) and/or IP).
  • TCP transmission control protocol
  • Yet another optional aspect may include a third-party server 274, which may be in communication with the LMF 270, the SLP 272, the 5GC 260 (e.g., via the AMF 264 and/or the UPF 262), the NG-RAN 220, and/or the UE 204 to obtain location information (e.g., a location estimate) for the UE 204.
  • the third-party server 274 may be referred to as a location services (LCS) client or an external client.
  • the third- party server 274 can be implemented as a plurality of separate servers (e.g., physically separate servers, different software modules on a single server, different software modules spread across multiple physical servers, etc.), or alternately may each correspond to a single server.
  • User plane interface 263 and control plane interface 265 connect the 5GC 260, and specifically the UPF 262 and AMF 264, respectively, to one or more gNBs 222 and/or ng-eNBs 224 in the NG-RAN 220.
  • the interface between gNB(s) 222 and/or ng-eNB(s) 224 and the AMF 264 is referred to as the “N2” interface
  • the interface between gNB(s) 222 and/or ng-eNB(s) 224 and the UPF 262 is referred to as the “N3” interface.
  • the gNB(s) 222 and/or ng-eNB(s) 224 of the NG-RAN 220 may communicate directly with each other via backhaul connections 223, referred to as the “Xn-C” interface.
  • One or more of gNBs 222 and/or ng-eNBs 224 may communicate with one or more UEs 204 over a wireless interface, referred to as the “Uu” interface.
  • a gNB 222 may be divided between a gNB central unit (gNB-CU) 226, one or more gNB distributed units (gNB-DUs) 228, and one or more gNB radio units (gNB-RUs) 229.
  • gNB-CU 226 is a logical node that includes the base station functions of transferring user data, mobility control, radio access network sharing, positioning, session management, and the like, except for those functions allocated exclusively to the gNB-DU(s) 228. More specifically, the gNB-CU 226 generally host the radio resource control (RRC), service data adaptation protocol (SDAP), and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) protocols of the gNB 222.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • a gNB-DU 228 is a logical node that generally hosts the radio link control (RLC) and medium access control (MAC) layer of the gNB 222. Its operation is controlled by the gNB-CU 226.
  • One gNB-DU 228 can support one or more cells, and one cell is supported by only one gNB-DU 228.
  • the interface 232 between the gNB-CU 226 and the one or more gNB-DUs 228 is referred to as the “Fl” interface.
  • the physical (PHY) layer functionality of a gNB 222 is generally hosted by one or more standalone gNB-RUs 229 that perform functions such as power amplification and signal transmission/reception.
  • a UE 204 communicates with the gNB-CU 226 via the RRC, SDAP, and PDCP layers, with a gNB-DU 228 via the RLC and MAC layers, and with a gNB-RU 229 via the PHY layer.
  • Deployment of communication systems may be arranged in multiple manners with various components or constituent parts.
  • a network node, a network entity, a mobility element of a network, a RAN node, a core network node, a network element, or a network equipment, such as a base station, or one or more units (or one or more components) performing base station functionality may be implemented in an aggregated or disaggregated architecture.
  • a base station such as a Node B (NB), evolved NB (eNB), NR base station, 5GNB, access point (AP), a transmit receive point (TRP), or a cell, etc.
  • NB Node B
  • eNB evolved NB
  • 5GNB 5GNB
  • AP access point
  • TRP transmit receive point
  • a cell etc.
  • a base station may be implemented as an aggregated base station (also known as a standalone base station or a monolithic base station) or a disaggregated base station.
  • An aggregated base station may be configured to utilize a radio protocol stack that is physically or logically integrated within a single RAN node.
  • a disaggregated base station may be configured to utilize a protocol stack that is physically or logically distributed among two or more units (such as one or more central or centralized units (CUs), one or more distributed units (DUs), or one or more radio units (RUs)).
  • CUs central or centralized units
  • DUs distributed units
  • RUs radio units
  • a CU may be implemented within a RAN node, and one or more DUs may be co-located with the CU, or alternatively, may be geographically or virtually distributed throughout one or multiple other RAN nodes.
  • the DUs may be implemented to communicate with one or more RUs.
  • Each of the CU, DU and RU also can be implemented as virtual units, i.e., a virtual central unit (VCU), a virtual distributed unit (VDU), or a virtual radio unit (VRU).
  • VCU virtual central unit
  • VDU virtual distributed unit
  • VRU virtual radio unit
  • Base station-type operation or network design may consider aggregation characteristics of base station functionality.
  • disaggregated base stations may be utilized in an integrated access backhaul (IAB) network, an open radio access network (0-RAN (such as the network configuration sponsored by the 0-RAN Alliance)), or a virtualized radio access network (vRAN, also known as a cloud radio access network (C-RAN)).
  • vRAN virtualized radio access network
  • C-RAN cloud radio access network
  • Disaggregation may include distributing functionality across two or more units at various physical locations, as well as distributing functionality for at least one unit virtually, which can enable flexibility in network design.
  • the various units of the disaggregated base station, or disaggregated RAN architecture can
  • FIG. 2C illustrates an example disaggregated base station architecture 250, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • the disaggregated base station architecture 250 may include one or more central units (CUs) 280 (e.g., gNB-CU 226) that can communicate directly with a core network 267 (e.g., 5GC 210, 5GC 260) via a backhaul link, or indirectly with the core network 267 through one or more disaggregated base station units (such as a Near-Real Time (Near-RT) RAN Intelligent Controller (RIC) 259 via an E2 link, or a Non-Real Time (Non-RT) RIC 257 associated with a Service Management and Orchestration (SMO) Framework 255, or both).
  • CUs central units
  • a CU 280 may communicate with one or more distributed units (DUs) 285 (e.g., gNB-DUs 228) via respective midhaul links, such as an Fl interface.
  • the DUs 285 may communicate with one or more radio units (RUs) 287 (e.g., gNB-RUs 229) via respective fronthaul links.
  • the RUs 287 may communicate with respective UEs 204 via one or more radio frequency (RF) access links.
  • RF radio frequency
  • the UE 204 may be simultaneously served by multiple RUs 287.
  • Each of the units may include one or more interfaces or be coupled to one or more interfaces configured to receive or transmit signals, data, or information (collectively, signals) via a wired or wireless transmission medium.
  • Each of the units, or an associated processor or controller providing instructions to the communication interfaces of the units can be configured to communicate with one or more of the other units via the transmission medium.
  • the units can include a wired interface configured to receive or transmit signals over a wired transmission medium to one or more of the other units.
  • the units can include a wireless interface, which may include a receiver, a transmitter or transceiver (such as a radio frequency (RF) transceiver), configured to receive or transmit signals, or both, over a wireless transmission medium to one or more of the other units.
  • a wireless interface which may include a receiver, a transmitter or transceiver (such as a radio frequency (RF) transceiver), configured to receive or transmit signals, or both, over a wireless transmission medium to one or more of the other units.
  • RF radio frequency
  • the CU 280 may host one or more higher layer control functions. Such control functions can include radio resource control (RRC), packet data convergence protocol (PDCP), service data adaptation protocol (SDAP), or the like. Each control function can be implemented with an interface configured to communicate signals with other control functions hosted by the CU 280.
  • the CU 280 may be configured to handle user plane functionality (i.e., Central Unit - User Plane (CU-UP)), control plane functionality (i.e., Central Unit - Control Plane (CU-CP)), or a combination thereof.
  • the CU 280 can be logically split into one or more CU-UP units and one or more CU-CP units.
  • the CU-UP unit can communicate bidirectionally with the CU-CP unit via an interface, such as the El interface when implemented in an 0-RAN configuration.
  • the CU 280 can be implemented to communicate with the DU 285, as necessary, for network control and signaling.
  • the DU 285 may correspond to a logical unit that includes one or more base station functions to control the operation of one or more RUs 287.
  • the DU 285 may host one or more of a radio link control (RLC) layer, a medium access control (MAC) layer, and one or more high physical (PHY) layers (such as modules for forward error correction (FEC) encoding and decoding, scrambling, modulation and demodulation, or the like) depending, at least in part, on a functional split, such as those defined by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP).
  • the DU 285 may further host one or more low PHY layers. Each layer (or module) can be implemented with an interface configured to communicate signals with other layers (and modules) hosted by the DU 285, or with the control functions hosted by the CU 280.
  • Lower-layer functionality can be implemented by one or more RUs 287.
  • an RU 287 controlled by a DU 285, may correspond to a logical node that hosts RF processing functions, or low-PHY layer functions (such as performing fast Fourier transform (FFT), inverse FFT (iFFT), digital beamforming, physical random access channel (PRACH) extraction and filtering, or the like), or both, based at least in part on the functional split, such as a lower layer functional split.
  • the RU(s) 287 can be implemented to handle over the air (OTA) communication with one or more UEs 204.
  • OTA over the air
  • real-time and non-real-time aspects of control and user plane communication with the RU(s) 287 can be controlled by the corresponding DU 285.
  • this configuration can enable the DU(s) 285 and the CU 280 to be implemented in a cloud-based RAN architecture, such as a vRAN architecture.
  • the SMO Framework 255 may be configured to support RAN deployment and provisioning of non-virtualized and virtualized network elements.
  • the SMO Framework 255 may be configured to support the deployment of dedicated physical resources for RAN coverage requirements which may be managed via an operations and maintenance interface (such as an 01 interface).
  • the SMO Framework 255 may be configured to interact with a cloud computing platform (such as an open cloud (O-Cloud) 269) to perform network element life cycle management (such as to instantiate virtualized network elements) via a cloud computing platform interface (such as an 02 interface).
  • a cloud computing platform such as an open cloud (O-Cloud) 269) to perform network element life cycle management (such as to instantiate virtualized network elements) via a cloud computing platform interface (such as an 02 interface).
  • Such virtualized network elements can include, but are not limited to, CUs 280, DUs 285, RUs 287 and Near-RT RICs 259.
  • the SMO Framework 255 can communicate with a hardware aspect of a 4G RAN, such as an open eNB (O-eNB) 261, via an 01 interface. Additionally, in some implementations, the SMO Framework 255 can communicate directly with one or more RUs 287 via an 01 interface.
  • the SMO Framework 255 also may include a Non-RT RIC 257 configured to support functionality of the SMO Framework 255.
  • the Non-RT RIC 257 may be configured to include a logical function that enables non- real-time control and optimization of RAN elements and resources, Artificial Intelligence/Machine Learning (AI/ML) workflows including model training and updates, or policy-based guidance of applications/features in the Near-RT RIC 259.
  • the Non-RT RIC 257 may be coupled to or communicate with (such as via an Al interface) the Near-RT RIC 259.
  • the Near-RT RIC 259 may be configured to include a logical function that enables near-real-time control and optimization of RAN elements and resources via data collection and actions over an interface (such as via an E2 interface) connecting one or more CUs 280, one or more DUs 285, or both, as well as an O-eNB, with the Near-RT RIC 259.
  • the Non-RT RIC 257 may receive parameters or external enrichment information from external servers. Such information may be utilized by the Near-RT RIC 259 and may be received at the SMO Framework 255 or the Non-RT RIC 257 from non-network data sources or from network functions.
  • the Non-RT RIC 257 or the Near-RT RIC 259 may be configured to tune RAN behavior or performance.
  • the Non-RT RIC 257 may monitor long-term trends and patterns for performance and employ AI/ML models to perform corrective actions through the SMO Framework 255 (such as reconfiguration via 01) or via creation of RAN management policies (such as Al policies).
  • FIGS. 3A, 3B, and 3C illustrate several example components (represented by corresponding blocks) that may be incorporated into a UE 302 (which may correspond to any of the UEs described herein), a base station 304 (which may correspond to any of the base stations described herein), and a network entity 306 (which may correspond to or embody any of the network functions described herein, including the location server 230 and the LMF 270, or alternatively may be independent from the NG-RAN 220 and/or 5GC 210/260 infrastructure depicted in FIGS. 2 A and 2B, such as a private network) to support the operations described herein.
  • a UE 302 which may correspond to any of the UEs described herein
  • a base station 304 which may correspond to any of the base stations described herein
  • a network entity 306 which may correspond to or embody any of the network functions described herein, including the location server 230 and the LMF 270, or alternatively may be independent from the NG-RAN 220 and/or
  • these components may be implemented in different types of apparatuses in different implementations (e.g., in an ASIC, in a system-on-chip (SoC), etc.).
  • the illustrated components may also be incorporated into other apparatuses in a communication system.
  • other apparatuses in a system may include components similar to those described to provide similar functionality.
  • a given apparatus may contain one or more of the components.
  • an apparatus may include multiple transceiver components that enable the apparatus to operate on multiple carriers and/or communicate via different technologies.
  • the UE 302 and the base station 304 each include one or more wireless wide area network (WWAN) transceivers 310 and 350, respectively, providing means for communicating (e.g., means for transmitting, means for receiving, means for measuring, means fortuning, means for refraining from transmitting, etc.) via one or more wireless communication networks (not shown), such as an NR network, an LTE network, a GSM network, and/or the like.
  • WWAN wireless wide area network
  • the WWAN transceivers 310 and 350 may each be connected to one or more antennas 316 and 356, respectively, for communicating with other network nodes, such as other UEs, access points, base stations (e.g., eNBs, gNBs), etc., via at least one designated RAT (e.g., NR, LTE, GSM, etc.) over a wireless communication medium of interest (e.g., some set of time/frequency resources in a particular frequency spectrum).
  • a wireless communication medium of interest e.g., some set of time/frequency resources in a particular frequency spectrum.
  • the WWAN transceivers 310 and 350 may be variously configured for transmitting and encoding signals 318 and 358 (e.g., messages, indications, information, and so on), respectively, and, conversely, for receiving and decoding signals 318 and 358 (e.g., messages, indications, information, pilots, and so on), respectively, in accordance with the designated RAT.
  • the WWAN transceivers 310 and 350 include one or more transmitters 314 and 354, respectively, for transmitting and encoding signals 318 and 358, respectively, and one or more receivers 312 and 352, respectively, for receiving and decoding signals 318 and 358, respectively.
  • the UE 302 and the base station 304 each also include, at least in some cases, one or more short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360, respectively.
  • the short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 may be connected to one or more antennas 326 and 366, respectively, and provide means for communicating (e.g., means for transmitting, means for receiving, means for measuring, means for tuning, means for refraining from transmitting, etc.) with other network nodes, such as other UEs, access points, base stations, etc., via at least one designated RAT (e.g., WiFi, LTE-D, Bluetooth®, Zigbee®, Z-Wave®, PC5, dedicated short-range communications (DSRC), wireless access for vehicular environments (WAVE), near-field communication (NFC), ultra-wideband (UWB), etc.) over a wireless communication medium of interest.
  • RAT e.g., WiFi, LTE-D, Bluetooth®, Zigbee®, Z-Wave®, PC5, dedicated
  • the short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 may be variously configured for transmitting and encoding signals 328 and 368 (e.g., messages, indications, information, and so on), respectively, and, conversely, for receiving and decoding signals 328 and 368 (e.g., messages, indications, information, pilots, and so on), respectively, in accordance with the designated RAT.
  • the short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 include one or more transmitters 324 and 364, respectively, for transmitting and encoding signals 328 and 368, respectively, and one or more receivers 322 and 362, respectively, for receiving and decoding signals 328 and 368, respectively.
  • the short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 may be WiFi transceivers, Bluetooth® transceivers, Zigbee® and/or Z-Wave® transceivers, NFC transceivers, UWB transceivers, or vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) and/or vehicle-to-everything (V2X) transceivers.
  • the UE 302 and the base station 304 also include, at least in some cases, satellite signal receivers 330 and 370.
  • the satellite signal receivers 330 and 370 may be connected to one or more antennas 336 and 376, respectively, and may provide means for receiving and/or measuring satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378, respectively.
  • the satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378 may be global positioning system (GPS) signals, global navigation satellite system (GLONASS) signals, Galileo signals, Beidou signals, Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System (NAVIC), QuasiZenith Satellite System (QZSS), etc.
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • Galileo signals Galileo signals
  • Beidou signals Beidou signals
  • NAVIC Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System
  • QZSS QuasiZenith Satellite System
  • the satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378 may be communication signals (e.g., carrying control and/or user data) originating from a 5G network.
  • the satellite signal receivers 330 and 370 may comprise any suitable hardware and/or software for receiving and processing satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378, respectively.
  • the satellite signal receivers 330 and 370 may request information and operations as appropriate from the other systems, and, at least in some cases, perform calculations to determine locations of the UE 302 and the base station 304, respectively, using measurements obtained by any suitable satellite positioning system algorithm.
  • the base station 304 and the network entity 306 each include one or more network transceivers 380 and 390, respectively, providing means for communicating (e.g., means for transmitting, means for receiving, etc.) with other network entities (e.g., other base stations 304, other network entities 306).
  • the base station 304 may employ the one or more network transceivers 380 to communicate with other base stations 304 or network entities 306 over one or more wired or wireless backhaul links.
  • the network entity 306 may employ the one or more network transceivers 390 to communicate with one or more base station 304 over one or more wired or wireless backhaul links, or with other network entities 306 over one or more wired or wireless core network interfaces.
  • a transceiver may be configured to communicate over a wired or wireless link.
  • a transceiver (whether a wired transceiver or a wireless transceiver) includes transmitter circuitry (e.g., transmitters 314, 324, 354, 364) and receiver circuitry (e.g., receivers 312, 322, 352, 362).
  • a transceiver may be an integrated device (e.g., embodying transmitter circuitry and receiver circuitry in a single device) in some implementations, may comprise separate transmitter circuitry and separate receiver circuitry in some implementations, or may be embodied in other ways in other implementations.
  • the transmitter circuitry and receiver circuitry of a wired transceiver may be coupled to one or more wired network interface ports.
  • Wireless transmitter circuitry e.g., transmitters 314, 324, 354, 364
  • wireless receiver circuitry may include or be coupled to a plurality of antennas (e.g., antennas 316, 326, 356, 366), such as an antenna array, that permits the respective apparatus (e.g., UE 302, base station 304) to perform receive beamforming, as described herein.
  • the transmitter circuitry and receiver circuitry may share the same plurality of antennas (e.g., antennas 316, 326, 356, 366), such that the respective apparatus can only receive or transmit at a given time, not both at the same time.
  • a wireless transceiver e.g., WWAN transceivers 310 and 350, short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360
  • NLM network listen module
  • the various wireless transceivers e.g., transceivers 310, 320, 350, and 360, and network transceivers 380 and 390 in some implementations
  • wired transceivers e.g., network transceivers 380 and 390 in some implementations
  • a transceiver at least one transceiver
  • wired transceivers e.g., network transceivers 380 and 390 in some implementations
  • backhaul communication between network devices or servers will generally relate to signaling via a wired transceiver
  • wireless communication between a UE (e.g., UE 302) and a base station (e.g., base station 304) will generally relate to signaling via a wireless transceiver.
  • the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 also include other components that may be used in conjunction with the operations as disclosed herein.
  • the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 include one or more processors 332, 384, and 394, respectively, for providing functionality relating to, for example, wireless communication, and for providing other processing functionality.
  • the processors 332, 384, and 394 may therefore provide means for processing, such as means for determining, means for calculating, means for receiving, means for transmitting, means for indicating, etc.
  • the processors 332, 384, and 394 may include, for example, one or more general purpose processors, multi-core processors, central processing units (CPUs), ASICs, digital signal processors (DSPs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), other programmable logic devices or processing circuitry, or various combinations thereof.
  • the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 include memory circuitry implementing memories 340, 386, and 396 (e.g., each including a memory device), respectively, for maintaining information (e.g., information indicative of reserved resources, thresholds, parameters, and so on).
  • the memories 340, 386, and 396 may therefore provide means for storing, means for retrieving, means for maintaining, etc.
  • the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 may include positioning component 342, 388, and 398, respectively.
  • the positioning component 342, 388, and 398 may be hardware circuits that are part of or coupled to the processors 332, 384, and 394, respectively, that, when executed, cause the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 to perform the functionality described herein. In other aspects, the positioning component 342, 388, and 398 may be external to the processors 332, 384, and 394 (e.g., part of a modem processing system, integrated with another processing system, etc.).
  • the positioning component 342, 388, and 398 may be memory modules stored in the memories 340, 386, and 396, respectively, that, when executed by the processors 332, 384, and 394 (or a modem processing system, another processing system, etc.), cause the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 to perform the functionality described herein.
  • FIG. 3A illustrates possible locations of the positioning component 342, which may be, for example, part of the one or more WWAN transceivers 310, the memory 340, the one or more processors 332, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component.
  • FIG. 3A illustrates possible locations of the positioning component 342, which may be, for example, part of the one or more WWAN transceivers 310, the memory 340, the one or more processors 332, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component.
  • FIG. 3B illustrates possible locations of the positioning component 388, which may be, for example, part of the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the memory 386, the one or more processors 384, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component.
  • FIG. 3C illustrates possible locations of the positioning component 398, which may be, for example, part of the one or more network transceivers 390, the memory 396, the one or more processors 394, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component.
  • the UE 302 may include one or more sensors 344 coupled to the one or more processors 332 to provide means for sensing or detecting movement and/or orientation information that is independent of motion data derived from signals received by the one or more WWAN transceivers 310, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 320, and/or the satellite signal receiver 330.
  • the sensor(s) 344 may include an accelerometer (e.g., a micro-electrical mechanical systems (MEMS) device), a gyroscope, a geomagnetic sensor (e.g., a compass), an altimeter (e.g., a barometric pressure altimeter), and/or any other type of movement detection sensor.
  • MEMS micro-electrical mechanical systems
  • the senor(s) 344 may include a plurality of different types of devices and combine their outputs in order to provide motion information.
  • the sensor(s) 344 may use a combination of a multi-axis accelerometer and orientation sensors to provide the ability to compute positions in two-dimensional (2D) and/or three-dimensional (3D) coordinate systems.
  • the UE 302 includes a user interface 346 providing means for providing indications (e.g., audible and/or visual indications) to a user and/or for receiving user input (e.g., upon user actuation of a sensing device such a keypad, a touch screen, a microphone, and so on).
  • a user interface 346 providing means for providing indications (e.g., audible and/or visual indications) to a user and/or for receiving user input (e.g., upon user actuation of a sensing device such a keypad, a touch screen, a microphone, and so on).
  • the base station 304 and the network entity 306 may also include user interfaces.
  • IP packets from the network entity 306 may be provided to the processor 384.
  • the one or more processors 384 may implement functionality for an RRC layer, a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, a radio link control (RLC) layer, and a medium access control (MAC) layer.
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC medium access control
  • the one or more processors 384 may provide RRC layer functionality associated with broadcasting of system information (e.g., master information block (MIB), system information blocks (SIBs)), RRC connection control (e.g., RRC connection paging, RRC connection establishment, RRC connection modification, and RRC connection release), inter-RAT mobility, and measurement configuration for UE measurement reporting; PDCP layer functionality associated with header compression/decompression, security (ciphering, deciphering, integrity protection, integrity verification), and handover support functions; RLC layer functionality associated with the transfer of upper layer PDUs, error correction through automatic repeat request (ARQ), concatenation, segmentation, and reassembly of RLC service data units (SDUs), re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs, and reordering of RLC data PDUs; and MAC layer functionality associated with mapping between logical channels and transport channels, scheduling information reporting, error correction, priority handling, and logical channel prioritization.
  • RRC layer functionality associated with broadcasting of system
  • the transmitter 354 and the receiver 352 may implement Layer- 1 (LI) functionality associated with various signal processing functions.
  • Layer- 1 which includes a physical (PHY) layer, may include error detection on the transport channels, forward error correction (FEC) coding/decoding of the transport channels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping onto physical channels, modulation/demodulation of physical channels, and MIMO antenna processing.
  • the transmitter 354 handles mapping to signal constellations based on various modulation schemes (e.g., binary phase-shift keying (BPSK), quadrature phase-shift keying (QPSK), M-phase-shift keying (M-PSK), M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM)).
  • BPSK binary phase-shift keying
  • QPSK quadrature phase-shift keying
  • M-PSK M-phase-shift keying
  • M-QAM M-quadrature amplitude modulation
  • Each stream may then be mapped to an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) subcarrier, multiplexed with a reference signal (e.g., pilot) in the time and/or frequency domain, and then combined together using an inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) to produce a physical channel carrying a time domain OFDM symbol stream.
  • OFDM symbol stream is spatially precoded to produce multiple spatial streams.
  • Channel estimates from a channel estimator may be used to determine the coding and modulation scheme, as well as for spatial processing.
  • the channel estimate may be derived from a reference signal and/or channel condition feedback transmitted by the UE 302.
  • Each spatial stream may then be provided to one or more different antennas 356.
  • the transmitter 354 may modulate an RF carrier with a respective spatial stream for transmission.
  • the receiver 312 receives a signal through its respective antenna(s) 316.
  • the receiver 312 recovers information modulated onto an RF carrier and provides the information to the one or more processors 332.
  • the transmitter 314 and the receiver 312 implement Lay er- 1 functionality associated with various signal processing functions.
  • the receiver 312 may perform spatial processing on the information to recover any spatial streams destined for the UE 302. If multiple spatial streams are destined for the UE 302, they may be combined by the receiver 312 into a single OFDM symbol stream.
  • the receiver 312 then converts the OFDM symbol stream from the time-domain to the frequency domain using a fast Fourier transform (FFT).
  • FFT fast Fourier transform
  • the symbols on each subcarrier, and the reference signal are recovered and demodulated by determining the most likely signal constellation points transmitted by the base station 304. These soft decisions may be based on channel estimates computed by a channel estimator. The soft decisions are then decoded and de-interleaved to recover the data and control signals that were originally transmitted by the base station 304 on the physical channel. The data and control signals are then provided to the one or more processors 332, which implements Layer-3 (L3) and Layer-2 (L2) functionality.
  • L3 Layer-3
  • L2 Layer-2
  • the one or more processors 332 provides demultiplexing between transport and logical channels, packet reassembly, deciphering, header decompression, and control signal processing to recover IP packets from the core network.
  • the one or more processors 332 are also responsible for error detection.
  • the one or more processors 332 provides RRC layer functionality associated with system information (e.g., MIB, SIBs) acquisition, RRC connections, and measurement reporting; PDCP layer functionality associated with header compression/decompression, and security (ciphering, deciphering, integrity protection, integrity verification); REC layer functionality associated with the transfer of upper layer PDUs, error correction through ARQ, concatenation, segmentation, and reassembly of RLC SDUs, re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs, and reordering of RLC data PDUs; and MAC layer functionality associated with mapping between logical channels and transport channels, multiplexing of MAC SDUs onto transport blocks (TBs), demultiplexing of MAC SDUs from TBs, scheduling information reporting, error correction through hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ), priority handling, and logical channel prioritization.
  • RRC layer functionality associated with system information (e.g., MIB, SIBs) acquisition, RRC connections, and measurement reporting
  • Channel estimates derived by the channel estimator from a reference signal or feedback transmitted by the base station 304 may be used by the transmitter 314 to select the appropriate coding and modulation schemes, and to facilitate spatial processing.
  • the spatial streams generated by the transmitter 314 may be provided to different antenna(s) 316.
  • the transmitter 314 may modulate an RF carrier with a respective spatial stream for transmission.
  • the uplink transmission is processed at the base station 304 in a manner similar to that described in connection with the receiver function at the UE 302.
  • the receiver 352 receives a signal through its respective antenna(s) 356.
  • the receiver 352 recovers information modulated onto an RF carrier and provides the information to the one or more processors 384.
  • the one or more processors 384 provides demultiplexing between transport and logical channels, packet reassembly, deciphering, header decompression, control signal processing to recover IP packets from the UE 302. IP packets from the one or more processors 384 may be provided to the core network.
  • the one or more processors 384 are also responsible for error detection.
  • the UE 302, the base station 304, and/or the network entity 306 are shown in FIGS. 3 A, 3B, and 3C as including various components that may be configured according to the various examples described herein. It will be appreciated, however, that the illustrated components may have different functionality in different designs. In particular, various components in FIGS. 3A to 3C are optional in alternative configurations and the various aspects include configurations that may vary due to design choice, costs, use of the device, or other considerations. For example, in case of FIG.
  • a particular implementation of UE 302 may omit the WWAN transceiver(s) 310 (e.g., a wearable device or tablet computer or PC or laptop may have Wi-Fi and/or Bluetooth capability without cellular capability), or may omit the short-range wireless transceiver s) 320 (e.g., cellular-only, etc.), or may omit the satellite signal receiver 330, or may omit the sensor(s) 344, and so on.
  • WWAN transceiver(s) 310 e.g., a wearable device or tablet computer or PC or laptop may have Wi-Fi and/or Bluetooth capability without cellular capability
  • the short-range wireless transceiver s) 320 e.g., cellular-only, etc.
  • satellite signal receiver 330 e.g., cellular-only, etc.
  • a particular implementation of the base station 304 may omit the WWAN transceiver(s) 350 (e.g., a Wi-Fi “hotspot” access point without cellular capability), or may omit the short-range wireless transceiver( s) 360 (e.g., cellular-only, etc.), or may omit the satellite signal receiver 370, and so on.
  • WWAN transceiver(s) 350 e.g., a Wi-Fi “hotspot” access point without cellular capability
  • the short-range wireless transceiver( s) 360 e.g., cellular-only, etc.
  • satellite signal receiver 370 e.g., satellite signal receiver
  • the various components of the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 may be communicatively coupled to each other over data buses 334, 382, and 392, respectively.
  • the data buses 334, 382, and 392 may form, or be part of, a communication interface of the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306, respectively.
  • the data buses 334, 382, and 392 may provide communication between them.
  • FIGS. 3A, 3B, and 3C may be implemented in various ways.
  • the components of FIGS. 3 A, 3B, and 3C may be implemented in one or more circuits such as, for example, one or more processors and/or one or more ASICs (which may include one or more processors).
  • each circuit may use and/or incorporate at least one memory component for storing information or executable code used by the circuit to provide this functionality.
  • some or all of the functionality represented by blocks 310 to 346 may be implemented by processor and memory component(s) of the UE 302 (e.g., by execution of appropriate code and/or by appropriate configuration of processor components).
  • some or all of the functionality represented by blocks 350 to 388 may be implemented by processor and memory component(s) of the base station 304 (e.g., by execution of appropriate code and/or by appropriate configuration of processor components). Also, some or all of the functionality represented by blocks 390 to 398 may be implemented by processor and memory component(s) of the network entity 306 (e.g., by execution of appropriate code and/or by appropriate configuration of processor components). For simplicity, various operations, acts, and/or functions are described herein as being performed “by a UE,” “by a base station,” “by a network entity,” etc.
  • the network entity 306 may be implemented as a core network component. In other designs, the network entity 306 may be distinct from a network operator or operation of the cellular network infrastructure (e.g., NG RAN 220 and/or 5GC 210/260). For example, the network entity 306 may be a component of a private network that may be configured to communicate with the UE 302 via the base station 304 or independently from the base station 304 (e.g., over a non-cellular communication link, such as WiFi).
  • a non-cellular communication link such as WiFi
  • NR supports a number of cellular network-based positioning technologies, including downlink-based, uplink-based, and downlink-and-uplink-based positioning methods.
  • Downlink-based positioning methods include observed time difference of arrival (OTDOA) in LTE, downlink time difference of arrival (DL-TDOA) in NR, and downlink angle-of-departure (DL-AoD) in NR.
  • OTDOA observed time difference of arrival
  • DL-TDOA downlink time difference of arrival
  • DL-AoD downlink angle-of-departure
  • FIG. 4 illustrates examples of various positioning methods, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • a UE measures the differences between the times of arrival (ToAs) of reference signals (e.g., positioning reference signals (PRS)) received from pairs of base stations, referred to as reference signal time difference (RSTD) or time difference of arrival (TDOA) measurements, and reports them to a positioning entity. More specifically, the UE receives the identifiers (IDs) of a reference base station (e.g., a serving base station) and multiple non-reference base stations in assistance data. The UE then measures the RSTD between the reference base station and each of the non-reference base stations. Based on the known locations of the involved base stations and the RSTD measurements, the positioning entity (e.g., the UE for UE-based positioning or a location server for UE-assisted positioning) can estimate the UE’s location.
  • ToAs times of arrival
  • PRS positioning reference signals
  • RSTD reference signal time difference
  • TDOA time difference of arrival
  • the positioning entity uses a measurement report from the UE of received signal strength measurements of multiple downlink transmit beams to determine the angle(s) between the UE and the transmitting base station(s). The positioning entity can then estimate the location of the UE based on the determined angle(s) and the known location(s) of the transmitting base station(s).
  • Uplink-based positioning methods include uplink time difference of arrival (UL-TDOA) and uplink angle-of-arrival (UL-AoA).
  • UL-TDOA is similar to DL-TDOA, but is based on uplink reference signals (e.g., sounding reference signals (SRS)) transmitted by the UE to multiple base stations.
  • uplink reference signals e.g., sounding reference signals (SRS)
  • SRS sounding reference signals
  • a UE transmits one or more uplink reference signals that are measured by a reference base station and a plurality of non-reference base stations.
  • Each base station reports the reception time (referred to as the relative time of arrival (RTOA)) of the reference signal(s) to a positioning entity (e.g., a location server) that knows the locations and relative timing of the involved base stations.
  • a positioning entity e.g., a location server
  • the positioning entity can estimate the location of the UE using TDOA.
  • one or more base stations measure the received signal strength of one or more uplink reference signals (e.g., SRS) received from a UE on one or more uplink receive beams.
  • the positioning entity uses the signal strength measurements and the angle(s) of the receive beam(s) to determine the angle(s) between the UE and the base station(s). Based on the determined angle(s) and the known location(s) of the base station(s), the positioning entity can then estimate the location of the UE.
  • uplink reference signals e.g., SRS
  • Downlink-and-uplink-based positioning methods include enhanced cell-ID (E-CID) positioning and multi -round-trip-time (RTT) positioning (also referred to as “multi-cell RTT” and “multi -RTT”).
  • E-CID enhanced cell-ID
  • RTT multi -round-trip-time
  • a first entity e.g., a base station or a UE
  • a second entity e.g., a UE or base station
  • a second RTT-related signal e.g., an SRS or PRS
  • Each entity measures the time difference between the time of arrival (ToA) of the received RTT-related signal and the transmission time of the transmitted RTT-related signal. This time difference is referred to as a reception-to-transmission (Rx- Tx) time difference.
  • the Rx-Tx time difference measurement may be made, or may be adjusted, to include only a time difference between nearest slot boundaries for the received and transmitted signals.
  • Both entities may then send their Rx-Tx time difference measurement to a location server (e.g., an LMF 270), which calculates the round trip propagation time (i.e., RTT) between the two entities from the two Rx-Tx time difference measurements (e.g., as the sum of the two Rx-Tx time difference measurements).
  • a location server e.g., an LMF 270
  • one entity may send its Rx-Tx time difference measurement to the other entity, which then calculates the RTT.
  • the distance between the two entities can be determined from the RTT and the known signal speed (e.g., the speed of light).
  • a first entity e.g., a UE or base station
  • multiple second entities e.g., multiple base stations or UEs
  • RTT and multi-RTT methods can be combined with other positioning techniques, such as UL-AoA and DL-AoD, to improve location accuracy, as illustrated by scenario 440.
  • the E-CID positioning method is based on radio resource management (RRM) measurements.
  • RRM radio resource management
  • the UE reports the serving cell ID, the timing advance (TA), and the identifiers, estimated timing, and signal strength of detected neighbor base stations.
  • the location of the UE is then estimated based on this information and the known locations of the base station(s).
  • a location server may provide assistance data to the UE.
  • the assistance data may include identifiers of the base stations (or the cells/TRPs of the base stations) from which to measure reference signals, the reference signal configuration parameters (e.g., the number of consecutive slots including PRS, periodicity of the consecutive slots including PRS, muting sequence, frequency hopping sequence, reference signal identifier, reference signal bandwidth, etc.), and/or other parameters applicable to the particular positioning method.
  • the assistance data may originate directly from the base stations themselves (e.g., in periodically broadcasted overhead messages, etc.).
  • the UE may be able to detect neighbor network nodes itself without the use of assistance data.
  • the assistance data may further include an expected RSTD value and an associated uncertainty, or search window, around the expected RSTD.
  • the value range of the expected RSTD may be +/- 500 microseconds (ps).
  • the value range for the uncertainty of the expected RSTD may be +/- 32 ps.
  • the value range for the uncertainty of the expected RSTD may be +/- 8 ps.
  • a location estimate may be referred to by other names, such as a position estimate, location, position, position fix, fix, or the like.
  • a location estimate may be geodetic and comprise coordinates (e.g., latitude, longitude, and possibly altitude) or may be civic and comprise a street address, postal address, or some other verbal description of a location.
  • a location estimate may further be defined relative to some other known location or defined in absolute terms (e.g., using latitude, longitude, and possibly altitude).
  • a location estimate may include an expected error or uncertainty (e.g., by including an area or volume within which the location is expected to be included with some specified or default level of confidence).
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram 500 illustrating an example frame structure, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • the frame structure may be a downlink or uplink frame structure.
  • Other wireless communications technologies may have different frame structures and/or different channels.
  • LTE and in some cases NR, utilizes orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) on the downlink and single-carrier frequency division multiplexing (SC-FDM) on the uplink.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing
  • SC-FDM single-carrier frequency division multiplexing
  • OFDM and SC-FDM partition the system bandwidth into multiple (K) orthogonal subcarriers, which are also commonly referred to as tones, bins, etc. Each subcarrier may be modulated with data.
  • modulation symbols are sent in the frequency domain with OFDM and in the time domain with SC-FDM.
  • the spacing between adjacent subcarriers may be fixed, and the total number of subcarriers (K) may be dependent on the system bandwidth.
  • the spacing of the subcarriers may be 15 kilohertz (kHz) and the minimum resource allocation (resource block) may be 12 subcarriers (or 180 kHz). Consequently, the nominal fast Fourier transform (FFT) size may be equal to 128, 256, 512, 1024, or 2048 for system bandwidth of 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, or 20 megahertz (MHz), respectively.
  • the system bandwidth may also be partitioned into subbands. For example, a subband may cover 1.08 MHz (i.e., 6 resource blocks), and there may be 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 subbands for system bandwidth of 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, or 20 MHz, respectively.
  • LTE supports a single numerology (subcarrier spacing (SCS), symbol length, etc.).
  • p subcarrier spacing
  • 15 kHz SCS there is one slot per subframe, 10 slots per frame, the slot duration is 1 millisecond (ms)
  • the symbol duration is 66.7 microseconds (ps)
  • the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 50.
  • For 120 kHz SCS (p 3), there are eight slots per subframe, 80 slots per frame, the slot duration is 0.125 ms, the symbol duration is 8.33 ps, and the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 400.
  • For 240 kHz SCS (p 4), there are 16 slots per subframe, 160 slots per frame, the slot duration is 0.0625 ms, the symbol duration is 4.17 ps, and the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 800.
  • a numerology of 15 kHz is used.
  • a 10 ms frame is divided into 10 equally sized subframes of 1 ms each, and each subframe includes one time slot.
  • time is represented horizontally (on the X axis) with time increasing from left to right, while frequency is represented vertically (on the Y axis) with frequency increasing (or decreasing) from bottom to top.
  • a resource grid may be used to represent time slots, each time slot including one or more time-concurrent resource blocks (RBs) (also referred to as physical RBs (PRBs)) in the frequency domain.
  • RBs time-concurrent resource blocks
  • PRBs physical RBs
  • the resource grid is further divided into multiple resource elements (REs).
  • An RE may correspond to one symbol length in the time domain and one subcarrier in the frequency domain.
  • an RB may contain 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain and seven consecutive symbols in the time domain, for a total of 84 REs.
  • an RB may contain 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain and six consecutive symbols in the time domain, for a total of 72 REs.
  • the number of bits carried by each RE depends on the modulation scheme.
  • the REs may carry reference (pilot) signals (RS).
  • the reference signals may include positioning reference signals (PRS), tracking reference signals (TRS), phase tracking reference signals (PTRS), cell-specific reference signals (CRS), channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DMRS), primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondary synchronization signals (SSS), synchronization signal blocks (SSBs), sounding reference signals (SRS), etc., depending on whether the illustrated frame structure is used for uplink or downlink communication.
  • PRS positioning reference signals
  • TRS tracking reference signals
  • PTRS phase tracking reference signals
  • CRS cell-specific reference signals
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signals
  • DMRS demodulation reference signals
  • PSS primary synchronization signals
  • SSS secondary synchronization signals
  • SSBs synchronization signal blocks
  • SRS sounding reference signals
  • a collection of resource elements (REs) that are used for transmission of PRS is referred to as a “PRS resource.”
  • the collection of resource elements can span multiple PRBs in the frequency domain and ‘N’ (such as 1 or more) consecutive symbol(s) within a slot in the time domain.
  • N such as 1 or more
  • a PRS resource occupies consecutive PRBs in the frequency domain.
  • a comb size ‘N’ represents the subcarrier spacing (or frequency/tone spacing) within each symbol of a PRS resource configuration.
  • PRS are transmitted in every Nth subcarrier of a symbol of a PRB.
  • REs corresponding to every fourth subcarrier such as subcarriers 0, 4, 8 are used to transmit PRS of the PRS resource.
  • comb sizes of comb-2, comb-4, comb-6, and comb- 12 are supported for DL-PRS.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates an example PRS resource configuration for comb-4 (which spans four symbols). That is, the locations of the shaded REs (labeled “R”) indicate a comb-4 PRS resource configuration.
  • a DL-PRS resource may span 2, 4, 6, or 12 consecutive symbols within a slot with a fully frequency-domain staggered pattern.
  • a DL-PRS resource can be configured in any higher layer configured downlink or flexible (FL) symbol of a slot.
  • FL downlink or flexible
  • 2-symbol comb-2 ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ ; 4-symbol comb-2: ⁇ 0, 1, 0, 1 ⁇ ; 6-symbol comb-2: ⁇ 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1 ⁇ ; 12-symbol comb-2: ⁇ 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1 ⁇ ; 4-symbol comb-4: ⁇ 0, 2, 1, 3 ⁇ (as in the example of FIG.
  • 12-symbol comb-4 ⁇ 0, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 1, 3 ⁇
  • 6-symbol comb-6 ⁇ 0, 3, 1, 4, 2, 5 ⁇
  • 12-symbol comb-6 ⁇ 0, 3, 1, 4, 2, 5, 0, 3, 1, 4, 2, 5 ⁇
  • 12-symbol comb-12 ⁇ 0, 6, 3, 9, 1, 7, 4, 10, 2, 8, 5, H ⁇ .
  • a “PRS resource set” is a set of PRS resources used for the transmission of PRS signals, where each PRS resource has a PRS resource ID.
  • the PRS resources in a PRS resource set are associated with the same TRP.
  • a PRS resource set is identified by a PRS resource set ID and is associated with a particular TRP (identified by a TRP ID).
  • the PRS resources in a PRS resource set have the same periodicity, a common muting pattern configuration, and the same repetition factor (such as “PRS- ResourceRepetitionF actor”) across slots.
  • the periodicity is the time from the first repetition of the first PRS resource of a first PRS instance to the same first repetition of the same first PRS resource of the next PRS instance.
  • the repetition factor may have a length selected from ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 16, 32 ⁇ slots.
  • a PRS resource ID in a PRS resource set is associated with a single beam (or beam ID) transmitted from a single TRP (where a TRP may transmit one or more beams). That is, each PRS resource of a PRS resource set may be transmitted on a different beam, and as such, a “PRS resource,” or simply “resource,” also can be referred to as a “beam.” Note that this does not have any implications on whether the TRPs and the beams on which PRS are transmitted are known to the UE.
  • a “PRS instance” or “PRS occasion” is one instance of a periodically repeated time window (such as a group of one or more consecutive slots) where PRS are expected to be transmitted.
  • a PRS occasion also may be referred to as a “PRS positioning occasion,” a “PRS positioning instance, a “positioning occasion,” “a positioning instance,” a “positioning repetition,” or simply an “occasion,” an “instance,” or a “repetition.”
  • a “positioning frequency layer” (also referred to simply as a “frequency layer”) is a collection of one or more PRS resource sets across one or more TRPs that have the same values for certain parameters. Specifically, the collection of PRS resource sets has the same subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix (CP) type (meaning all numerologies supported for the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) are also supported for PRS), the same Point A, the same value of the downlink PRS bandwidth, the same start PRB (and center frequency), and the same comb-size.
  • CP subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix
  • the Point A parameter takes the value of the parameter “ARFCN-ValueNR” (where “ARFCN” stands for “absolute radio-frequency channel number”) and is an identifier/code that specifies a pair of physical radio channel used for transmission and reception.
  • the downlink PRS bandwidth may have a granularity of four PRBs, with a minimum of 24 PRBs and a maximum of 272 PRBs.
  • up to four frequency layers have been defined, and up to two PRS resource sets may be configured per TRP per frequency layer.
  • a frequency layer is somewhat like the concept of component carriers and bandwidth parts (BWPs), but different in that component carriers and BWPs are used by one base station (or a macro cell base station and a small cell base station) to transmit data channels, while frequency layers are used by several (usually three or more) base stations to transmit PRS.
  • a UE may indicate the number of frequency layers it can support when it sends the network its positioning capabilities, such as during an LTE positioning protocol (LPP) session. For example, a UE may indicate whether it can support one or four positioning frequency layers.
  • LPP LTE positioning protocol
  • positioning reference signal generally refer to specific reference signals that are used for positioning in NR and LTE systems.
  • the terms “positioning reference signal” and “PRS” may also refer to any type of reference signal that can be used for positioning, such as but not limited to, PRS as defined in LTE and NR, TRS, PTRS, CRS, CSLRS, DMRS, PSS, SSS, SSB, SRS, UL-PRS, etc.
  • the terms “positioning reference signal” and “PRS” may refer to downlink, uplink, or sidelink positioning reference signals, unless otherwise indicated by the context.
  • a downlink positioning reference signal may be referred to as a “DL-PRS”
  • an uplink positioning reference signal e.g., an SRS-for-positioning, PTRS
  • a sidelink positioning reference signal may be referred to as an “SL-PRS.”
  • the signals may be prepended with “DL,” “UL,” or “SL” to distinguish the direction.
  • DL-DMRS is different from “DL-DMRS .”
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram 600 illustrating an example PRS configuration for two TRPs (labeled “TRP1” and “TRP2”) operating in the same positioning frequency layer (labeled “Positioning Frequency Layer 1”), according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • a UE may be provided with assistance data indicating the illustrated PRS configuration.
  • the first TRP (“TRP1”) is associated with (e.g., transmits) two PRS resource sets, labeled “PRS Resource Set 1” and “PRS Resource Set 2,” and the second TRP (“TRP2”) is associated with one PRS resource set, labeled “PRS Resource Set 3.”
  • Each PRS resource set comprises at least two PRS resources.
  • the first PRS resource set (“PRS Resource Set 1”) includes PRS resources labeled “PRS Resource 1” and “PRS Resource 2”
  • the second PRS resource set (“PRS Resource Set 2”) includes PRS resources labeled “PRS Resource 3” and “PRS Resource 4”
  • the third PRS resource set (“PRS Resource Set 3”) includes PRS resources labeled “PRS Resource 5” and “PRS Resource 6.”
  • the UE When a UE is configured in the assistance data of a positioning method with a number of PRS resources beyond its capability, the UE assumes the PRS resources in the assistance data are sorted in a decreasing order of measurement priority.
  • the 64 TRPs per frequency layer are sorted according to priority and the two PRS resource sets per TRP of the frequency layer are sorted according to priority.
  • the four frequency layers may or may not be sorted according to priority, and the 64 PRS resources of the PRS resource set per TRP per frequency layer may or may not be sorted according to priority.
  • the reference indicated by the assistance data parameter “nr-DL-PRS- Referencelnfo” for each frequency layer has the highest priority, at least for DL-TDOA positioning procedures.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram of an example PRS configuration 700 for the PRS transmissions of a given base station, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • time is represented horizontally, increasing from left to right.
  • Each long rectangle represents a slot and each short (shaded) rectangle represents an OFDM symbol.
  • a PRS resource set 710 (labeled “PRS resource set 1”) includes two PRS resources, a first PRS resource 712 (labeled “PRS resource 1”) and a second PRS resource 714 (labeled “PRS resource 2”).
  • the base station transmits PRS on the PRS resources 712 and 714 of the PRS resource set 710.
  • the PRS resource set 710 has an occasion length (N PRS) of two slots and a periodicity (T PRS) of, for example, 160 slots or 160 milliseconds (ms) (for 15 kHz subcarrier spacing).
  • N PRS occasion length
  • T PRS periodicity
  • both the PRS resources 712 and 714 are two consecutive slots in length and repeat every T PRS slots, starting from the slot in which the first symbol of the respective PRS resource occurs.
  • the PRS resource 712 has a symbol length (N_symb) of two symbols
  • the PRS resource 714 has a symbol length (N_symb) of four symbols.
  • the PRS resource 712 and the PRS resource 714 may be transmitted on separate beams of the same base station.
  • the PRS resources 712 and 714 are repeated every T PRS slots up to the muting sequence periodicity T REP.
  • a bitmap of length T REP would be needed to indicate which occasions of instances 720a, 720b, and 720c of PRS resource set 710 are muted (i.e., not transmitted).
  • the base station can configure the following parameters to be the same: (a) the occasion length (N_PRS), (b) the number of symbols (N_symb), (c) the comb type, and/or (d) the bandwidth.
  • N_PRS occasion length
  • N_symb number of symbols
  • comb type comb type
  • the bandwidth the bandwidth of the PRS resources of all PRS resource sets
  • the subcarrier spacing and the cyclic prefix can be configured to be the same for one base station or for all base stations. Whether it is for one base station or all base stations may depend on the UE’s capability to support the first and/or second option.
  • a cellular repeater is used to improve network connectivity.
  • a repeater commonly includes a donor antenna that receives downlink signals from nearby base stations and a rebroadcast antenna that transmits the downlink signals to one or more UEs.
  • the rebroadcast antenna receives uplink signals from the one or more UEs and the donor antenna transmits the signals to the nearby base stations.
  • Repeater communication can increase throughput, data rate, and cellular coverage, and is especially beneficial due to its ability to increase the diversity gain in a fading environment.
  • FIGS. 8A to 8D illustrate the differences between a repeater function and a relay function, as well as some technical challenges faced by conventional repeater and relay functions.
  • the generic term repeater/relay unit is used to refer to a network node that performs a repeater function, a relay function, or both. Where the RU does a particular function, repeater or relay, that will be so indicated.
  • FIG. 8A shows a repeater function, in which a repeater receives a first signal (labeled “X”) from a transmitter node (labeled “Nl”) and sends a second signal (labeled “X”’) to a receiver node (labeled “N2”).
  • the repeater essentially regenerates the signal X as X’, for example, by duplicating the tones of X. From a signal processing point of view, X and X’ would appear the same at the receiver node N2.
  • the transmitter node Nl may be a gNB and the receiver node N2 may be a UE, in which case, the connection between the gNB and the repeater is referred to as a fronthaul link, while the connection between the repeater and the UE is referred to as an access link.
  • FIGS. 8 A to 8D are referred to as integrated access fronthaul (IAF) networks.
  • FIG. 8B shows a relay function, in which a relay node receives a first signal (labeled “X”) from a transmitter node (labeled “Nl”) and generates a second signal (labeled “Y”), which carries information about or from the first signal X.
  • the relay node does not replicate the tones of the original signal X, but instead, contains essentially the same content as the first signal X, but in a different form (represented as “f(X)”).
  • signal X may be a front-haul physical downlink shared channel (FH-PDSCH) having a payload that carries some information (e.g., IQ samples), and signal Y may be a legacy PDSCH that is generated based upon that information.
  • FH-PDSCH front-haul physical downlink shared channel
  • PUSCH legacy physical uplink shared channel
  • FH-PUSCH fronthaul physical uplink shared channel
  • FIG. 8C shows the repeater of FIG. 8 A, but with the roles of the transmitter node XI and receiver node X2 reversed.
  • FIG. 8D shows the relay of FIG. 8C, but with the roles of the transmitter node XI and receiver node X2 reversed.
  • a repeater may serve as a PRS transmission point. If a repeater can repeat (or reflect or relay) a PRS, then the positioning entity can use the repeater as an anchor node (i.e., a transmitter with a known location) for positioning a target UE.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram 900 illustrating an example wireless environment in which a base station is transmitting PRS to UEs in various geographical areas, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • a base station 902 is transmitting a first PRS (labeled “PRS1”) towards a first UE 904-1 (labeled “UE1”) in a first region 910-1 (labeled “Region 1”), a second PRS (labeled “PRS2”) towards a repeater 920, and a third PRS (labeled “PRS3”) towards a second UE 904-2 (labeled “UE2”) in a second region 910-2 (labeled “Region 2”).
  • the repeater 920 is configured to repeat (or reflect or relay) “PRS2” towards the second UE 904-2 and a third UE 904-3 (labeled “UE3”) in a third region 910-3 (labeled “Region 3”).
  • regions 910-1 and 910-2 are within the direct coverage area of the base station 902, while region 910-3 is out of direct coverage of the base station 902.
  • region 910-2 is within the coverage area of both the base station 902 and the repeater 920.
  • UEs within only the coverage area of the repeater 920 e.g., UE 904-3) may be referred to as “remote” UEs.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates a single UE 904 in each region 910, as will be appreciated, there may be more than one UE 904 in a region 910.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates the base station 902 transmitting three PRS (e.g., PRS resources) on three downlink transmit beams, respectively, as will be appreciated, there may be more or fewer than three PRS and three beams.
  • PRS e.g., PRS resources
  • a UE may be able to receive PRS only from a base station (e.g., UE 904-1), or may be able to receive PRS only from a repeater (e.g., UE 904-3), or may be able to receive PRS from both a base station and a repeater (e.g., UE 904-2).
  • a base station e.g., UE 904-1
  • a repeater e.g., UE 904-3
  • UE 904-2 may be able to receive PRS from both a base station and a repeater.
  • the SSB/PRS from the base station and the repeater may be the same or different.
  • a repeater may cause interference and confusion for other base stations and/or UEs.
  • ToF time-of-flight
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram 1000 illustrating an example wireless environment in which a base station is beam sweeping PRS resources to multiple UEs, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • a base station 1002 e.g., any of the base stations described herein
  • N downlink transmit beams e.g., N downlink transmit beams.
  • the base station 1002 is configured to transmit at least the first PRS resource (labeled “PRS 1”) towards a second UE 1004-2 (labeled “UE2”) and at least the Nth PRS resource (labeled “PRS N”) towards a first UE 1004-1 (labeled “UE1”).
  • PRS 1 the first PRS resource
  • UE2 the second UE 1004-2
  • PRS N the Nth PRS resource
  • the base station 1002 is further configured to transmit multiple PRS resources towards a repeater 1020 (e.g., any of the repeaters described herein).
  • a repeater 1020 e.g., any of the repeaters described herein.
  • the base station 1002 transmits PRS resources n+1 and n+2 (labeled “PRS n+1” and “PRS n+2”) towards the repeater 1020, but as will be appreciated, the base station 1002 may transmit more than two PRS resources towards the repeater 1020.
  • the base station 1002 transmits multiple PRS resources towards the repeater 1020 to enable the repeater 1020 to beam sweep the received PRS resources.
  • FIG. 1020 e.g., any of the repeaters described herein.
  • the repeater 1020 forwards the received subset of PRS resources on the access link (i.e., PRS resources n+1 and n+2).
  • PRS resources n+1 and n+2 the access link
  • a UE may be configured with positioning assistance data (e.g., in an LPP Provide Assistance Data message from the LMF 270) for one or both of the base station 1002 and the repeater 1020.
  • the assistance data may include the PRS resources associated with a first TRP (here, base station 1002) and a second TRP (here, repeater 1020).
  • the assistance data may include the set of PRS resources ⁇ PRS 1, ..., PRS n, PRS n+3, ..., PRS N ⁇ .
  • the assistance data may include the set of PRS resources ⁇ PRS n+1, PRS n+2 ⁇ .
  • N - 2 PRS resources i.e., PRS resources ⁇ PRS 1, ..., PRS n, PRS n+3, ..., PRS N ⁇
  • PRS resources ⁇ PRS n+1, PRS n+2 ⁇ there are two TRPs, one transmitting N - 2 PRS resources (i.e., PRS resources ⁇ PRS 1, ..., PRS n, PRS n+3, ..., PRS N ⁇ ) and the other transmitting two PRS resources (i.e., PRS resources ⁇ PRS n+1, PRS n+2 ⁇ ).
  • This assistance data configuration would allow a UE to collect measurements with and without the repeater 1020. That is, a UE within the coverage area of only the base station 1002 (e.g., UE 1004-1) would be able to measure PRS resources in the set ⁇ PRS 1, ..., PRS n, PRS n+3, ..., PRS N ⁇ , while a UE within the coverage area of only the repeater 1020 (e.g., UE 1004-3) would be able to measure PRS resources in the set ⁇ PRS n+1, PRS n+2 ⁇ . These UE’s may be able to detect PRS resources in the other set, but the signal strength would likely be very low, and the measurement(s) could be rejected (e.g., by the network) as an outlier.
  • a UE in the coverage area of both the base station 1002 and the repeater 1020 would likely be able to measure PRS resources in both sets ⁇ PRS 1, ..., PRS n, PRS n+3, ..., PRS N ⁇ and ⁇ PRS n+1, PRS n+2 ⁇ .
  • the UEs coverage cases can be determined.
  • the repeater 1020 may be turned OFF during the time instances (e.g., symbols) that PRS resources ⁇ PRS 1, PRS n, PRS n+3, PRS N ⁇ are transmitted by the base station 1002 and turned ON during the time instances that PRS resources ⁇ PRS n+1, PRS n+2 ⁇ are transmitted by the base station 1002.
  • the base station s 1002 beam sweep of PRS resource set ⁇ PRS 1, PRS n, PRS n+3,
  • PRS N ⁇ and the repeater’s 1020 beam sweep of PRS resource set ⁇ PRS n+1, PRS n+2 ⁇ should be on consecutive symbols/slots. That is, the repeater 1020 should transmit PRS resources ⁇ PRS n+1, PRS n+2 ⁇ in the symbols or slots immediately following the symbols or slots on which the base station 1002 transmitted PRS resources ⁇ PRS 1, ..., PRS n, PRS n+3, ..., PRS N ⁇ , rather than simply after whatever delay is caused by the repeater’s 1020 hardware. In that way, the two PRS resource sets will be within the channel coherence time (the time during which the UE can expect the channel to remain the same) and any measured difference would be due to the repeater’s 1020 ON-OFF pattern.
  • the repeater 1020 should be turned OFF so that the base station 1002 can perform only direct measurements from the UEs 1004.
  • the location server e.g., LMF 270
  • NRPPa New Radio positioning protocol type A
  • the configuration may include parameters such as bandwidth, periodicity, repetition factor, etc.
  • a DU (e.g., DU 285) can also configure/reconfigure/turn off a TRP. If available, a DU should consider the location server’s request to configure/reconfigure/turn off a TRP and carry out the request if possible.
  • the location server can indicate which TRPs should perform SRS measurements via, for example, an NRPPa Measurement Request message.
  • the location server can indicate that a repeater TRP (e.g., repeater 1020) is turned OFF during uplink positioning reference signal transmissions (e.g., SRS).
  • a DU should consider the location server’s request and fulfill it if possible.
  • a location server cannot request the time resources on which a TRP should transmit PRS resources.
  • a location server currently cannot request that the base station’s 1002 beam sweep of PRS resource set ⁇ PRS 1, PRS n, PRS n+3, PRS N ⁇ and the repeater’s 1020 beam sweep of PRS resource set ⁇ PRS n+1, PRS n+2 ⁇ be on consecutive symbols/slots.
  • the present disclosure proposes to enable the location server to indicate the time-domain resources to be used for PRS transmission.
  • the location server may indicate the start symbol, or symbol offset, of a PRS resource within a slot. This would allow the location server to indicate PRS configurations with overlapping and/or consecutive PRS resources transmitted and/or forwards by a TRP (including a repeater). This would also allow the location server to specify muting patterns for PRS resources transmitted or forwarded by the TRPs.
  • the location server may indicate which TRP should be the donor TRP for the repeater. In that way, different PRS resource sets forwarded by a repeater may come from (be associated with) different donor TRPs.
  • Non-donor TRPs should be configured to orthogonalize their transmissions to the transmissions of the donor TRP so that the repeater can be configured to not repeat the transmissions from the non-donor TRPs. For example, the non-donor TRPs may transmit on different time and/or frequency resources than the donor TRP.
  • the base station 1002 if base station 1002 needs to communicate with UE 1004-3 and vice versa, irrespective of positioning operations, the communication must go through the repeater 1020.
  • the base station 1002 therefore needs to configure the repeater 1020 to be ON when transmitting to the UE 1004-3 or receiving from the UE 1004-3.
  • the base station 1002 first needs to determine whether the repeater 1020 is needed in order to communicate with the UE 1004-3.
  • a serving base station may make such a determination based on multiple measurements of uplink channel state reference signals (e.g., SRS, etc.). Specifically, the base station 1002 may obtain measurements of the uplink reference signal(s) during periods of time when the repeater 1020 is ON and periods of time when the repeater 1020 is OFF.
  • uplink channel state reference signals e.g., SRS, etc.
  • the base station 1002 can determine that the base station 1002 needs the repeater 1020 to be ON when communicating with the UE (e.g., UE 1004-3).
  • the serving base station may determine whether the UE is in the coverage area of the repeater based on measurement reports of downlink channel state reference signals (e.g., CSI-RS, PRS, etc.) obtained by the UE. Specifically, the UE may obtain measurements of the downlink reference signal(s) during periods of time when the repeater 1020 is ON and periods of time when the repeater 1020 is OFF. If the signal strength of the downlink reference signal (s) is higher when the repeater 1020 is ON versus when it is OFF, the base station 1002 can determine that the base station 1002 needs the repeater 1020 to be ON when communicating with the UE (e.g., UE 1004-3).
  • the UE e.g., UE 1004-3
  • the base station 1002 may need to configure the UE to transmit more instances of the channel state reference signal(s) than it normally would in order to test instances with the repeater 1020 OFF and ON.
  • the serving base station For positioning purposes, it would be beneficial for the serving base station to report to the location server that it is communicating with a UE (e.g., UE 1004-3) via a repeater. Accordingly, the present disclosure proposes signaling to enable a serving base station to report, to the location server, an indication of the repeater associated with a particular UE and/or the type of coverage region of a UE (e.g., direct, indirect, or overlapping).
  • a serving base station e.g., an indication of the repeater associated with a particular UE and/or the type of coverage region of a UE (e.g., direct, indirect, or overlapping).
  • the base station 1002 may report to the location server that UE 1004-1 is in direct coverage of the base station 1002, UE 1004-2 is in overlapping coverage of the base station 1002 (i.e., is within the coverage area of both the base station 1002 and the repeater 1020), and UE 1004-3 is in indirect coverage of the base station 1002.
  • the base station 1002 may also report an identifier or some other indication of the repeater 1020.
  • a location server may use an E-CID procedure to request a serving base station for the coarse location of a UE.
  • the UE position is estimated based on the knowledge of the geographical coordinates of the UE’s serving ng-eNB or gNB.
  • the E-CID procedure can be extended to enable the reporting of the type of coverage of a UE and/or the identifier of a repeater used to communicate with a UE.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates example E-CID measurement procedures between an NG-RAN node 1120 (e.g., a gNB 222 or an ng-eNB 224) and an LMF 270, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates an E-CID measurement initiation procedure 1100 and an E-CID measurement report procedure 1150 performed over NRPPa signaling.
  • the purpose of the E-CID measurement initiation procedure 1100 is to allow the LMF 270 to request the NG-RAN node 1120 to report E-CID measurements used by the LMF 270 to compute the location of a UE.
  • the LMF 270 initiates the E- CID measurement initiation procedure 1100 by sending an E-CID MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message. If the NG-RAN node 1120 is able to initiate the requested E-CID measurements, it replies with an E-CID MEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE message that includes the requested information (to the extent known/available).
  • the purpose of the E-CID measurement report procedure 1150 is for the NG-RAN node 1120 to provide the E-CID measurements for the UE to the LMF 270. As shown in FIG. 11, the NG-RAN node 1120 initiates the E-CID measurement report procedure 1150 by sending an E-CID MEASUREMENT REPORT message.
  • the E-CID MEASUREMENT REPORT message contains the E-CID measurement results according to the measurement configuration in the respective E-CID MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message.
  • the “Measured Results” information element is included in the “E-CID Measurement Result” IE of the E-CID MEASUREMENT REPORT message when measurement results other than the ‘Cell-ID’ have been requested.
  • the NG- RAN node 1120 includes the “NG-RAN Access Point Position” IE or the “Geographical Coordinates” IE, which is the configured estimated serving antenna position in the “E- CID Measurement Result” IE within the E-CID MEASUREMENT REPORT message.
  • the LMF 270 may use the value as the geographical position of the NG-RAN access point.
  • the NG- RAN node 1120 includes the “Cell Portion ID” IE in the E-CID MEASUREMENT REPORT message.
  • the LMF 270 may use the value as the cell portion for the measurement.
  • the “Cell Portion ID” field indicates the portion of a cell in which the UE is located.
  • the present disclosure proposes to extend an E-CID MEASUREMENT REPORT to include different Cell Portion IDs associated with a repeater’s or TRP’s coverage regions. That is, an additional Cell Portion ID may be added/included for each repeater associated with the reporting base station (e.g., repeater 1020 in the example of FIG. 10).
  • FIG. 12 illustrates an example method 1200 of communication, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • method 1200 may be performed by a location server (e.g., LMF 270).
  • LMF 270 location server
  • the location server transmits, to a network node, a PRS configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node.
  • operation 1210 may be performed by the one or more network transceivers 390, the one or more processors 394, memory 396, and/or positioning component 398, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
  • the location server receives, from at least one UE, a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
  • operation 1220 may be performed by the one or more network transceivers 390, the one or more processors 394, memory 396, and/or positioning component 398, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates an example method 1300 of communication, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • method 1300 may be performed by a location server (e.g., LMF 270).
  • LMF 270 location server
  • the location server transmits, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater.
  • operation 1310 may be performed by the one or more network transceivers 390, the one or more processors 394, memory 396, and/or positioning component 398, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
  • the location server transmits, to the first network node, a first PRS configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
  • operation 1320 may be performed by the one or more network transceivers 390, the one or more processors 394, memory 396, and/or positioning component 398, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates an example method 1400 of communication, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • method 1400 may be performed by a network node (e.g., a base station, TRP, cell, CU, DU, etc.).
  • a network node e.g., a base station, TRP, cell, CU, DU, etc.
  • the network node configures a UE (e.g., any of the UEs described herein) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances.
  • operation 1410 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
  • the network node configures a repeater (e.g., repeater 1020) associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances.
  • operation 1420 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more network transceivers 380, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
  • the network node attempts to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater.
  • operation 1430 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
  • the network node attempts to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater.
  • operation 1440 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
  • the network node transmits, to a location server (e.g., LMF 270), an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
  • operation 1450 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more network transceivers 380, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates an example method 1500 of communication, according to aspects of the disclosure.
  • method 1500 may be performed by a network node (e.g., a base station, TRP, cell, CU, DU, etc.).
  • a network node e.g., a base station, TRP, cell, CU, DU, etc.
  • the network node configures a UE (e.g., any of the UEs described herein) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances.
  • operation 1510 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
  • the network node configures a repeater (e.g., repeater 1020) associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances.
  • operation 1520 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
  • the network node receives one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both.
  • operation 1530 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
  • the network node transmits, to a location server (e.g., LMF 270), an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
  • operation 1540 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
  • a technical advantage of the methods 1200 to 1500 is improved ambiguity resolution in cases of repeater-based positioning and thereby more accurate and reliable estimation of the UE’s position.
  • a method of communication performed by a location server comprising: transmitting, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and receiving, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
  • PRS positioning reference signal
  • Clause 2 The method of clause 1, wherein the first set of time resources and the second set of time resources are consecutive time resources or overlapping time resources.
  • Clause 3 The method of any of clauses 1 to 2, further comprising: determining whether the at least one UE is within a coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report.
  • Clause 4 The method of clause 3, wherein: the at least one UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report including measurements of the second set of PRS resources, or the at least one UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report not including measurements of the second set of PRS resources.
  • Clause 5 The method of any of clauses 1 to 4, wherein the network node is configured to beam sweep at least the first set of PRS resources.
  • Clause 6 The method of any of clauses 1 to 5, further comprising: receiving, from the network node, an indication that the repeater is associated with the network node, a coverage area of the repeater, a repeater associated with the UE, a coverage area associated with the UE.
  • Clause 11 The method of any of clauses 1 to 10, further comprising: transmitting, to the UE, positioning assistance data for the plurality of PRS resources, wherein the positioning assistance data indicates the first set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the first set of time-domain resources and the second set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the second set of time-domain resources.
  • Clause 12 The method of any of clauses 1 to 11, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • a method of communication performed by a location server comprising: transmitting, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and transmitting, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
  • PRS positioning reference signal
  • Clause 14 The method of clause 13, further comprising: transmitting, to the first network node, a second message configuring a second donor for the repeater; and transmitting, to the first network node, a second PRS configuration for one or more second PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the second donor towards the repeater.
  • Clause 16 The method of any of clauses 13 to 15, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
  • NRPPa New Radio positioning protocol type A
  • Clause 17 The method of any of clauses 13 to 16, wherein the first network node is: a base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • Clause 18 The method of any of clauses 13 to 17, wherein the first donor is: a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the first network node, or a cell supported by the first network node.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • a method of communication performed by a network node comprising: configuring a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; attempting to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; attempting to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
  • UE user equipment
  • Clause 21 The method of any of clauses 19 to 20, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 22 The method of any of clauses 19 to 21, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 23 The method of any of clauses 19 to 22, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
  • E-CID enhanced cell identifier
  • Clause 24 The method of clause 23, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
  • Clause 25 The method of any of clauses 19 to 24, wherein the uplink reference signal comprises a sounding reference signal (SRS).
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • Clause 26 The method of any of clauses 19 to 25, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
  • Clause 27 The method of any of clauses 19 to 26, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • a method of communication performed by a network node comprising: configuring a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; receiving one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
  • UE user equipment
  • Clause 29 The method of clause 28, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on signal strengths of the measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than signal strengths of the measurements of the second subset of instances.
  • Clause 30 The method of any of clauses 28 to 29, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 31 The method of any of clauses 28 to 30, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 32 The method of any of clauses 28 to 31, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
  • E-CID enhanced cell identifier
  • Clause 33 The method of clause 32, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
  • Clause 34 The method of any of clauses 28 to 33, wherein the downlink reference signal comprises a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • Clause 35 The method of any of clauses 28 to 34, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
  • Clause 36 The method of any of clauses 28 to 35, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • a location server comprising: one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and receive, via the one or more transceivers, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or
  • UE user equipment
  • Clause 38 The location server of clause 37, wherein the first set of time resources and the second set of time resources are consecutive time resources or overlapping time resources.
  • Clause 39 The location server of any of clauses 37 to 38, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to: determine whether the at least one UE is within a coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report.
  • Clause 40 The location server of clause 39, wherein: the at least one UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report including measurements of the second set of PRS resources, or the at least one UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report not including measurements of the second set of PRS resources.
  • Clause 41 The location server of any of clauses 37 to 40, wherein the network node is configured to beam sweep at least the first set of PRS resources.
  • Clause 42 The location server of any of clauses 37 to 41, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to: receive, via the one or more transceivers, from the network node, an indication that the repeater is associated with the network node, a coverage area of the repeater, a repeater associated with the UE, a coverage area associated with the UE.
  • Clause 44 The location server of clause 43, wherein the indication is received in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
  • Clause 45 The location server of any of clauses 42 to 44, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
  • Clause 46 The location server of any of clauses 37 to 45, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
  • NRPPa New Radio positioning protocol type A
  • Clause 47 The location server of any of clauses 37 to 46, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the UE, positioning assistance data for the plurality of PRS resources, wherein the positioning assistance data indicates the first set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the first set of time-domain resources and the second set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the second set of time-domain resources.
  • Clause 48 The location server of any of clauses 37 to 47, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • a location server comprising: one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
  • PRS positioning reference signal
  • Clause 50 The location server of clause 49, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the first network node, a second message configuring a second donor for the repeater; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the first network node, a second PRS configuration for one or more second PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the second donor towards the repeater.
  • Clause 51 The location server of clause 50, wherein the first PRS resource set and the second PRS resource set are non-overlapping in time, frequency, or both.
  • Clause 52 The location server of any of clauses 49 to 51, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
  • NRPPa New Radio positioning protocol type A
  • Clause 53 The location server of any of clauses 49 to 52, wherein the first network node is: a base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • the first network node is: a base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • Clause 54 The location server of any of clauses 49 to 53, wherein the first donor is: a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the first network node, or a cell supported by the first network node.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • a network node comprising: one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: configure a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; attempt to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; attempt to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the
  • Clause 56 The network node of clause 55, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than the signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances.
  • Clause 57 The network node of any of clauses 55 to 56, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 58 The network node of any of clauses 55 to 57, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 60 The network node of clause 59, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
  • Clause 61 The network node of any of clauses 55 to 60, wherein the uplink reference signal comprises a sounding reference signal (SRS).
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • Clause 62 The network node of any of clauses 55 to 61, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
  • Clause 63 The network node of any of clauses 55 to 62, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • a network node comprising: one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: configure a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; receive, via the one or more transceivers, one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is
  • Clause 65 The network node of clause 64, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on signal strengths of the measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than signal strengths of the measurements of the second subset of instances.
  • Clause 66 The network node of any of clauses 64 to 65, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 67 The network node of any of clauses 64 to 66, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 68 The network node of any of clauses 64 to 67, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
  • E-CID enhanced cell identifier
  • Clause 69 The network node of clause 68, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
  • Clause 70 The network node of any of clauses 64 to 69, wherein the downlink reference signal comprises a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • Clause 71 The network node of any of clauses 64 to 70, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
  • Clause 72 The network node of any of clauses 64 to 71, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • a location server comprising: means for transmitting, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of timedomain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and means for receiving, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
  • UE user equipment
  • Clause 75 The location server of any of clauses 73 to 74, further comprising: means for determining whether the at least one UE is within a coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report.
  • Clause 76 The location server of clause 75, wherein: the at least one UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report including measurements of the second set of PRS resources, or the at least one UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report not including measurements of the second set of PRS resources.
  • Clause 77 The location server of any of clauses 73 to 76, wherein the network node is configured to beam sweep at least the first set of PRS resources.
  • Clause 78 The location server of any of clauses 73 to 77, further comprising: means for receiving, from the network node, an indication that the repeater is associated with the network node, a coverage area of the repeater, a repeater associated with the UE, a coverage area associated with the UE.
  • Clause 80 The location server of clause 79, wherein the indication is received in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
  • Clause 81 The location server of any of clauses 78 to 80, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
  • Clause 82 The location server of any of clauses 73 to 81, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
  • NRPPa New Radio positioning protocol type A
  • Clause 83 The location server of any of clauses 73 to 82, further comprising: means for transmitting, to the UE, positioning assistance data for the plurality of PRS resources, wherein the positioning assistance data indicates the first set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the first set of time-domain resources and the second set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the second set of time-domain resources.
  • Clause 84 The location server of any of clauses 73 to 83, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • a location server comprising: means for transmitting, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and means for transmitting, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
  • PRS positioning reference signal
  • Clause 86 The location server of clause 85, further comprising: means for transmitting, to the first network node, a second message configuring a second donor for the repeater; and means for transmitting, to the first network node, a second PRS configuration for one or more second PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the second donor towards the repeater.
  • Clause 87 The location server of clause 86, wherein the first PRS resource set and the second PRS resource set are non-overlapping in time, frequency, or both.
  • Clause 88 The location server of any of clauses 85 to 87, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
  • NRPPa New Radio positioning protocol type A
  • Clause 89 The location server of any of clauses 85 to 88, wherein the first network node is: a base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • the first network node is: a base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • Clause 90 The location server of any of clauses 85 to 89, wherein the first donor is: a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the first network node, or a cell supported by the first network node.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • a network node comprising: means for configuring a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; means for configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; means for attempting to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; means for attempting to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and means for transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
  • UE user equipment
  • Clause 92 The network node of clause 91, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than the signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances.
  • Clause 93 The network node of any of clauses 91 to 92, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 94 The network node of any of clauses 91 to 93, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 98 The network node of any of clauses 91 to 97, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
  • Clause 99 The network node of any of clauses 91 to 98, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • a network node comprising: means for configuring a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; means for configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; means for receiving one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and means for transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
  • UE user equipment
  • Clause 102 The network node of any of clauses 100 to 101 , wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 103 The network node of any of clauses 100 to 102, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 104 The network node of any of clauses 100 to 103, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
  • E-CID enhanced cell identifier
  • Clause 105 The network node of clause 104, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
  • Clause 106 The network node of any of clauses 100 to 105, wherein the downlink reference signal comprises a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • Clause 107 The network node of any of clauses 100 to 106, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
  • Clause 108 The network node of any of clauses 100 to 107, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a location server, cause the location server to: transmit, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and receive, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
  • UE user equipment
  • Clause 110 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 109, wherein the first set of time resources and the second set of time resources are consecutive time resources or overlapping time resources.
  • Clause 111 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 109 to 110, further comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the location server, cause the location server to: determine whether the at least one UE is within a coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report.
  • Clause 112. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 111, wherein: the at least one UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report including measurements of the second set of PRS resources, or the at least one UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report not including measurements of the second set of PRS resources.
  • Clause 113 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 109 to 112, wherein the network node is configured to beam sweep at least the first set of PRS resources.
  • Clause 114 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 109 to 113, further comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the location server, cause the location server to: receive, from the network node, an indication that the repeater is associated with the network node, a coverage area of the repeater, a repeater associated with the UE, a coverage area associated with the UE.
  • Clause 115 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 114, wherein the indication is received in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
  • E-CID enhanced cell identifier
  • Clause 116 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 115, wherein the indication is received in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
  • Clause 117 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 114 to 116, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
  • Clause 118 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 109 to 117, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
  • NRPPa New Radio positioning protocol type A
  • Clause 119 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 109 to 118, further comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the location server, cause the location server to: transmit, to the UE, positioning assistance data for the plurality of PRS resources, wherein the positioning assistance data indicates the first set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the first set of time-domain resources and the second set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the second set of time-domain resources.
  • Clause 120 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 109 to 119, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a location server, cause the location server to: transmit, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and transmit, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
  • PRS positioning reference signal
  • Clause 122 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 121, further comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the location server, cause the location server to: transmit, to the first network node, a second message configuring a second donor for the repeater; and transmit, to the first network node, a second PRS configuration for one or more second PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the second donor towards the repeater.
  • Clause 123 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 122, wherein the first PRS resource set and the second PRS resource set are non-overlapping in time, frequency, or both.
  • Clause 124 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 121 to 123, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
  • NRPPa New Radio positioning protocol type A
  • Clause 125 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 121 to 124, wherein the first network node is: a base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • the first network node is: a base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • Clause 126 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 121 to 125, wherein the first donor is: a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the first network node, or a cell supported by the first network node.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a network node, cause the network node to: configure a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; attempt to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; attempt to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and transmit, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
  • UE user equipment
  • Clause 128 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 127, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than the signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances.
  • Clause 129 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 127 to 128, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 130 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 127 to 129, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 131 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 127 to 130, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
  • E-CID enhanced cell identifier
  • Clause 132 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 131, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
  • Clause 133 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 127 to 132, wherein the uplink reference signal comprises a sounding reference signal (SRS).
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • Clause 134 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 127 to 133, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
  • Clause 135. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 127 to 134, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a network node, cause the network node to: configure a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; receive one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and transmit, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were
  • Clause 137 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 136, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on signal strengths of the measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than signal strengths of the measurements of the second subset of instances.
  • Clause 138 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 136 to 137, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 139 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 136 to 138, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
  • Clause 140 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 136 to 139, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
  • E-CID enhanced cell identifier
  • Clause 141 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 140, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
  • Clause 142 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 136 to 141, wherein the downlink reference signal comprises a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • Clause 143 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 136 to 142, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
  • Clause 144 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 136 to 143, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
  • TRP transmission-reception point
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field-programable gate array
  • a general -purpose processor may be a microprocessor, but in the alternative, the processor may be any conventional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine.
  • a processor may also be implemented as a combination of computing devices, for example, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, a plurality of microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core, or any other such configuration.
  • the methods, sequences and/or algorithms described in connection with the aspects disclosed herein may be embodied directly in hardware, in a software module executed by a processor, or in a combination of the two.
  • a software module may reside in random access memory (RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable ROM (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM), registers, hard disk, a removable disk, a CD-ROM, or any other form of storage medium known in the art.
  • An example storage medium is coupled to the processor such that the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium.
  • the storage medium may be integral to the processor.
  • the processor and the storage medium may reside in an ASIC.
  • the ASIC may reside in a user terminal (e.g., UE).
  • the processor and the storage medium may reside as discrete components in a user terminal.
  • the functions described may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented in software, the functions may be stored on or transmitted over as one or more instructions or code on a computer-readable medium.
  • Computer-readable media includes both computer storage media and communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another.
  • a storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by a computer.
  • such computer-readable media can comprise RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.
  • any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium.
  • the software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using a coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave
  • the coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of medium.
  • Disk and disc includes compact disc (CD), laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc (DVD), floppy disk and Blu-ray disc where disks usually reproduce data magnetically, while discs reproduce data optically with lasers. Combinations of the above should also be included within the scope of computer-readable media.
  • the terms “has,” “have,” “having,” “comprises,” “comprising,” “includes,” “including,” and the like does not preclude the presence of one or more additional elements (e.g., an element “having” A may also have B).
  • the phrase “based on” is intended to mean “based, at least in part, on” unless explicitly stated otherwise.
  • the term “or” is intended to be inclusive when used in a series and may be used interchangeably with “and/or,” unless explicitly stated otherwise (e.g., if used in combination with “either” or “only one of’) or the alternatives are mutually exclusive (e.g., “one or more” should not be interpreted as “one and more”).

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Radar, Positioning & Navigation (AREA)
  • Remote Sensing (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed are techniques for communication. In an aspect, a location server transmits, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node, and receives, from a user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.

Description

RESOLVING AMBIGUITY IN CASES OF REPEATER-BASED POSITIONING
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] The present Application for Patent claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/489,317, entitled “RESOLVING AMBIGUITY IN CASES OF REPEATER-BASED POSITIONING,” filed March 9, 2023, assigned to the assignee hereof, and expressly incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
BACKGROUND OF THE DISCLOSURE
1. Field of the Disclosure
[0002] Aspects of the disclosure relate generally to wireless communications.
2. Description of the Related Art
[0003] Wireless communication systems have developed through various generations, including a first-generation analog wireless phone service (1G), a second-generation (2G) digital wireless phone service (including interim 2.5G and 2.75G networks), a third-generation (3G) high speed data, Internet-capable wireless service and a fourth-generation (4G) service (e.g., Long Term Evolution (LTE) or WiMax). There are presently many different types of wireless communication systems in use, including cellular and personal communications service (PCS) systems. Examples of known cellular systems include the cellular analog advanced mobile phone system (AMPS), and digital cellular systems based on code division multiple access (CDMA), frequency division multiple access (FDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), the Global System for Mobile communications (GSM), etc.
[0004] A fifth generation (5G) wireless standard, referred to as New Radio (NR), enables higher data transfer speeds, greater numbers of connections, and better coverage, among other improvements. The 5G standard, according to the Next Generation Mobile Networks Alliance, is designed to provide higher data rates as compared to previous standards, more accurate positioning (e.g., based on reference signals for positioning (RS-P), such as downlink, uplink, or sidelink positioning reference signals (PRS)), and other technical enhancements. These enhancements, as well as the use of higher frequency bands, advances in PRS processes and technology, and high-density deployments for 5G, enable highly accurate 5G-based positioning.
SUMMARY
[0005] The following presents a simplified summary relating to one or more aspects disclosed herein. Thus, the following summary should not be considered an extensive overview relating to all contemplated aspects, nor should the following summary be considered to identify key or critical elements relating to all contemplated aspects or to delineate the scope associated with any particular aspect. Accordingly, the following summary has the sole purpose to present certain concepts relating to one or more aspects relating to the mechanisms disclosed herein in a simplified form to precede the detailed description presented below.
[0006] In an aspect, a method of communication performed by a location server includes transmitting, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and receiving, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
[0007] In an aspect, a method of communication performed by a location server includes transmitting, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and transmitting, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
[0008] In an aspect, a method of communication performed by a network node includes configuring a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; attempting to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; attempting to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0009] In an aspect, a method of communication performed by a network node includes configuring a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; receiving one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0010] In an aspect, a location server includes one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and receive, via the one or more transceivers, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
[0011] In an aspect, a location server includes one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
[0012] In an aspect, a network node includes one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: configure a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; attempt to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; attempt to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0013] In an aspect, a network node includes one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: configure a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; receive, via the one or more transceivers, one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0014] In an aspect, a location server includes means for transmitting, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of timedomain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and means for receiving, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
[0015] In an aspect, a location server includes means for transmitting, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and means for transmitting, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
[0016] In an aspect, a network node includes means for configuring a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; means for configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; means for attempting to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; means for attempting to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and means for transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0017] In an aspect, a network node includes means for configuring a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; means for configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; means for receiving one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and means for transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0018] In an aspect, a non-transitory computer-readable medium stores computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a location server, cause the location server to: transmit, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and receive, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
[0019] In an aspect, a non-transitory computer-readable medium stores computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a location server, cause the location server to: transmit, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and transmit, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
[0020] In an aspect, a non-transitory computer-readable medium stores computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a network node, cause the network node to: configure a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; attempt to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; attempt to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and transmit, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0021] In an aspect, a non-transitory computer-readable medium stores computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a network node, cause the network node to: configure a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; receive one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and transmit, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0022] Other obj ects and advantages associated with the aspects disclosed herein will be apparent to those skilled in the art based on the accompanying drawings and detailed description.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS [0023] The accompanying drawings are presented to aid in the description of various aspects of the disclosure and are provided solely for illustration of the aspects and not limitation thereof.
[0024] FIG. 1 illustrates an example wireless communications system, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0025] FIGS. 2 A, 2B, and 2C illustrate example wireless network structures, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0026] FIGS. 3A, 3B, and 3C are simplified block diagrams of several sample aspects of components that may be employed in a user equipment (UE), a base station, and a network entity, respectively, and configured to support communications as taught herein.
[0027] FIG. 4 illustrates examples of various positioning methods supported in New Radio (NR), according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0028] FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example frame structure, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0029] FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example downlink positioning reference signal (DL- PRS) configuration for two transmission-reception points (TRPs) operating in the same positioning frequency layer, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0030] FIG. 7 is a diagram of an example positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for the PRS transmissions of a given base station, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0031] FIGS. 8 A to 8D illustrate the differences between a repeater function and a relay function.
[0032] FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example wireless environment in which a base station is transmitting PRS to UEs in various geographical areas, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0033] FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example wireless environment in which a base station is beam sweeping PRS resources to multiple UEs, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0034] FIG. 11 illustrates example uplink enhanced cell identity (E-CID) measurement procedures between a next generation radio access network (NG-RAN) node and a location management function (LMF), according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0035] FIGS. 12 to 15 illustrate example methods of communication, according to aspects of the disclosure.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION [0036] Aspects of the disclosure are provided in the following description and related drawings directed to various examples provided for illustration purposes. Alternate aspects may be devised without departing from the scope of the disclosure. Additionally, well-known elements of the disclosure will not be described in detail or will be omitted so as not to obscure the relevant details of the disclosure.
[0037] Various aspects relate generally to repeater-based positioning. Some aspects more specifically relate to resolving ambiguity in cases of repeater-based positioning. In some examples, a location server may transmit, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for multiple PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node. The configuration indicates that a first set of the PRS resources are to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of the PRS resources are to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources towards a repeater. The network node transmits the PRS resources as configured, and at least one user equipment (UE) measures the PRS resources and transmits a measurement report to the location server. The location server can then determine whether the at least one UE is within a coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report.
[0038] In some examples, a location server may configure a network node as a donor network node to a repeater. Specifically, the location server may transmit, to the network node, a message configuring the network node to be a donor network node for a repeater. The location server may also transmit, to the network node, a PRS configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the network node towards the repeater.
[0039] In some examples, a network node may determine whether a UE is within a coverage area of a repeater. Specifically, the network node may configure the UE to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances. The network node may also configure the repeater with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances. The network node then attempts to measure a first subset of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater and a second subset of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater. The network node can then determine whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater based on whether measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both. [0040] Particular aspects of the subject matter described in this disclosure can be implemented to realize one or more of the following potential advantages. In some examples, by determining whether a UE is within a coverage area of a repeater, the described techniques can be used to provide appropriate positioning configurations to the involved network node(s) and the UE.
[0041] The words “exemplary” and/or “example” are used herein to mean “serving as an example, instance, or illustration.” Any aspect described herein as “exemplary” and/or “example” is not necessarily to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other aspects. Likewise, the term “aspects of the disclosure” does not require that all aspects of the disclosure include the discussed feature, advantage or mode of operation.
[0042] Those of skill in the art will appreciate that the information and signals described below may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies and techniques. For example, data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, and chips that may be referenced throughout the description below may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or particles, optical fields or particles, or any combination thereof, depending in part on the particular application, in part on the desired design, in part on the corresponding technology, etc.
[0043] Further, many aspects are described in terms of sequences of actions to be performed by, for example, elements of a computing device. It will be recognized that various actions described herein can be performed by specific circuits (e.g., application specific integrated circuits (ASICs)), by program instructions being executed by one or more processors, or by a combination of both. Additionally, the sequence(s) of actions described herein can be considered to be embodied entirely within any form of non- transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored therein a corresponding set of computer instructions that, upon execution, would cause or instruct an associated processor of a device to perform the functionality described herein. Thus, the various aspects of the disclosure may be embodied in a number of different forms, all of which have been contemplated to be within the scope of the claimed subject matter. In addition, for each of the aspects described herein, the corresponding form of any such aspects may be described herein as, for example, “logic configured to” perform the described action.
[0044] As used herein, the terms “user equipment” (UE) and “base station” are not intended to be specific or otherwise limited to any particular radio access technology (RAT), unless otherwise noted. In general, a UE may be any wireless communication device (e.g., a mobile phone, router, tablet computer, laptop computer, consumer asset locating device, wearable (e.g., smartwatch, glasses, augmented reality (AR) / virtual reality (VR) headset, etc.), vehicle (e.g., automobile, motorcycle, bicycle, etc.), Internet of Things (loT) device, etc.) used by a user to communicate over a wireless communications network. A UE may be mobile or may (e.g., at certain times) be stationary, and may communicate with a radio access network (RAN). As used herein, the term “UE” may be referred to interchangeably as an “access terminal” or “AT,” a “client device,” a “wireless device,” a “subscriber device,” a “subscriber terminal,” a “subscriber station,” a “user terminal” or “UT,” a “mobile device,” a “mobile terminal,” a “mobile station,” or variations thereof. Generally, UEs can communicate with a core network via a RAN, and through the core network the UEs can be connected with external networks such as the Internet and with other UEs. Of course, other mechanisms of connecting to the core network and/or the Internet are also possible for the UEs, such as over wired access networks, wireless local area network (WLAN) networks (e.g., based on the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 specification, etc.) and so on.
[0045] A base station may operate according to one of several RATs in communication with UEs depending on the network in which it is deployed, and may be alternatively referred to as an access point (AP), a network node, a NodeB, an evolved NodeB (eNB), a next generation eNB (ng-eNB), a New Radio (NR) Node B (also referred to as a gNB or gNodeB), etc. A base station may be used primarily to support wireless access by UEs, including supporting data, voice, and/or signaling connections for the supported UEs. In some systems a base station may provide purely edge node signaling functions while in other systems it may provide additional control and/or network management functions. A communication link through which UEs can send signals to a base station is called an uplink (UL) channel (e.g., a reverse traffic channel, a reverse control channel, an access channel, etc.). A communication link through which the base station can send signals to UEs is called a downlink (DL) or forward link channel (e.g., a paging channel, a control channel, a broadcast channel, a forward traffic channel, etc.). As used herein the term traffic channel (TCH) can refer to either an uplink / reverse or downlink / forward traffic channel. [0046] The term “base station” may refer to a single physical transmission-reception point (TRP) or to multiple physical TRPs that may or may not be co-located. For example, where the term “base station” refers to a single physical TRP, the physical TRP may be an antenna of the base station corresponding to a cell (or several cell sectors) of the base station. Where the term “base station” refers to multiple co-located physical TRPs, the physical TRPs may be an array of antennas (e.g., as in a multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) system or where the base station employs beamforming) of the base station. Where the term “base station” refers to multiple non-co-located physical TRPs, the physical TRPs may be a distributed antenna system (DAS) (a network of spatially separated antennas connected to a common source via a transport medium) or a remote radio head (RRH) (a remote base station connected to a serving base station). Alternatively, the non-co-located physical TRPs may be the serving base station receiving the measurement report from the UE and a neighbor base station whose reference radio frequency (RF) signals the UE is measuring. Because a TRP is the point from which a base station transmits and receives wireless signals, as used herein, references to transmission from or reception at a base station are to be understood as referring to a particular TRP of the base station.
[0047] In some implementations that support positioning of UEs, a base station may not support wireless access by UEs (e.g., may not support data, voice, and/or signaling connections for UEs), but may instead transmit reference signals to UEs to be measured by the UEs, and/or may receive and measure signals transmitted by the UEs. Such a base station may be referred to as a positioning beacon (e.g., when transmitting signals to UEs) and/or as a location measurement unit (e.g., when receiving and measuring signals from UEs).
[0048] An “RF signal” comprises an electromagnetic wave of a given frequency that transports information through the space between a transmitter and a receiver. As used herein, a transmitter may transmit a single “RF signal” or multiple “RF signals” to a receiver. However, the receiver may receive multiple “RF signals” corresponding to each transmitted RF signal due to the propagation characteristics of RF signals through multipath channels. The same transmitted RF signal on different paths between the transmitter and receiver may be referred to as a “multipath” RF signal. As used herein, an RF signal may also be referred to as a “wireless signal” or simply a “signal” where it is clear from the context that the term “signal” refers to a wireless signal or an RF signal. [0049] FIG. 1 illustrates an example wireless communications system 100, according to aspects of the disclosure. The wireless communications system 100 (which may also be referred to as a wireless wide area network (WWAN)) may include various base stations 102 (labeled “BS”) and various UEs 104. The base stations 102 may include macro cell base stations (high power cellular base stations) and/or small cell base stations (low power cellular base stations). In an aspect, the macro cell base stations may include eNBs and/or ng-eNBs where the wireless communications system 100 corresponds to an LTE network, or gNBs where the wireless communications system 100 corresponds to a NR network, or a combination of both, and the small cell base stations may include femtocells, picocells, microcells, etc.
[0050] The base stations 102 may collectively form a RAN and interface with a core network 170 (e.g., an evolved packet core (EPC) or a 5G core (5GC)) through backhaul links 122, and through the core network 170 to one or more location servers 172 (e.g., a location management function (LMF) or a secure user plane location (SUPL) location platform (SLP)). The location server(s) 172 may be part of core network 170 or may be external to core network 170. A location server 172 may be integrated with a base station 102. A UE 104 may communicate with a location server 172 directly or indirectly. For example, a UE 104 may communicate with a location server 172 via the base station 102 that is currently serving that UE 104. A UE 104 may also communicate with a location server 172 through another path, such as via an application server (not shown), via another network, such as via a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) (e.g., AP 150 described below), and so on. For signaling purposes, communication between a UE 104 and a location server 172 may be represented as an indirect connection (e.g., through the core network 170, etc.) or a direct connection (e.g., as shown via direct connection 128), with the intervening nodes (if any) omitted from a signaling diagram for clarity.
[0051] In addition to other functions, the base stations 102 may perform functions that relate to one or more of transferring user data, radio channel ciphering and deciphering, integrity protection, header compression, mobility control functions (e.g., handover, dual connectivity), inter-cell interference coordination, connection setup and release, load balancing, distribution for non-access stratum (NAS) messages, NAS node selection, synchronization, RAN sharing, multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS), subscriber and equipment trace, RAN information management (RIM), paging, positioning, and delivery of warning messages. The base stations 102 may communicate with each other directly or indirectly (e.g., through the EPC / 5GC) over backhaul links 134, which may be wired or wireless.
[0052] The base stations 102 may wirelessly communicate with the UEs 104. Each of the base stations 102 may provide communication coverage for a respective geographic coverage area 110. In an aspect, one or more cells may be supported by a base station 102 in each geographic coverage area 110. A “cell” is a logical communication entity used for communication with a base station (e.g., over some frequency resource, referred to as a carrier frequency, component carrier, carrier, band, or the like), and may be associated with an identifier (e.g., a physical cell identifier (PCI), an enhanced cell identifier (ECI), a virtual cell identifier (VCI), a cell global identifier (CGI), etc.) for distinguishing cells operating via the same or a different carrier frequency. In some cases, different cells may be configured according to different protocol types (e.g., machine-type communication (MTC), narrowband loT (NB-IoT), enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB), or others) that may provide access for different types of UEs. Because a cell is supported by a specific base station, the term “cell” may refer to either or both of the logical communication entity and the base station that supports it, depending on the context. In addition, because a TRP is typically the physical transmission point of a cell, the terms “cell” and “TRP” may be used interchangeably. In some cases, the term “cell” may also refer to a geographic coverage area of a base station (e.g., a sector), insofar as a carrier frequency can be detected and used for communication within some portion of geographic coverage areas 110.
[0053] While neighboring macro cell base station 102 geographic coverage areas 110 may partially overlap (e.g., in a handover region), some of the geographic coverage areas 110 may be substantially overlapped by a larger geographic coverage area 110. For example, a small cell base station 102' (labeled “SC” for “small cell”) may have a geographic coverage area 110' that substantially overlaps with the geographic coverage area 110 of one or more macro cell base stations 102. A network that includes both small cell and macro cell base stations may be known as a heterogeneous network. A heterogeneous network may also include home eNBs (HeNBs), which may provide service to a restricted group known as a closed subscriber group (CSG). [0054] The communication links 120 between the base stations 102 and the UEs 104 may include uplink (also referred to as reverse link) transmissions from a UE 104 to a base station 102 and/or downlink (DL) (also referred to as forward link) transmissions from a base station 102 to a UE 104. The communication links 120 may use MIMO antenna technology, including spatial multiplexing, beamforming, and/or transmit diversity. The communication links 120 may be through one or more carrier frequencies. Allocation of carriers may be asymmetric with respect to downlink and uplink (e.g., more or less carriers may be allocated for downlink than for uplink).
[0055] The wireless communications system 100 may further include a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) 150 in communication with WLAN stations (STAs) 152 via communication links 154 in an unlicensed frequency spectrum (e.g., 5 GHz). When communicating in an unlicensed frequency spectrum, the WLAN STAs 152 and/or the WLAN AP 150 may perform a clear channel assessment (CCA) or listen before talk (LBT) procedure prior to communicating in order to determine whether the channel is available.
[0056] The small cell base station 102' may operate in a licensed and/or an unlicensed frequency spectrum. When operating in an unlicensed frequency spectrum, the small cell base station 102' may employ LTE or NR technology and use the same 5 GHz unlicensed frequency spectrum as used by the WLAN AP 150. The small cell base station 102', employing LTE / 5G in an unlicensed frequency spectrum, may boost coverage to and/or increase capacity of the access network. NR in unlicensed spectrum may be referred to as NR-U. LTE in an unlicensed spectrum may be referred to as LTE-U, licensed assisted access (LAA), or MulteFire.
[0057] The wireless communications system 100 may further include a millimeter wave (mmW) base station 180 that may operate in mmW frequencies and/or near mmW frequencies in communication with a UE 182. Extremely high frequency (EHF) is part of the RF in the electromagnetic spectrum. EHF has a range of 30 GHz to 300 GHz and a wavelength between 1 millimeter and 10 millimeters. Radio waves in this band may be referred to as a millimeter wave. Near mmW may extend down to a frequency of 3 GHz with a wavelength of 100 millimeters. The super high frequency (SHF) band extends between 3 GHz and 30 GHz, also referred to as centimeter wave. Communications using the mmW/near mmW radio frequency band have high path loss and a relatively short range. The mmW base station 180 and the UE 182 may utilize beamforming (transmit and/or receive) over a mmW communication link 184 to compensate for the extremely high path loss and short range. Further, it will be appreciated that in alternative configurations, one or more base stations 102 may also transmit using mmW or near mmW and beamforming. Accordingly, it will be appreciated that the foregoing illustrations are merely examples and should not be construed to limit the various aspects disclosed herein.
[0058] Transmit beamforming is a technique for focusing an RF signal in a specific direction. Traditionally, when a network node (e.g., a base station) broadcasts an RF signal, it broadcasts the signal in all directions (omni-directionally). With transmit beamforming, the network node determines where a given target device (e.g., a UE) is located (relative to the transmitting network node) and projects a stronger downlink RF signal in that specific direction, thereby providing a faster (in terms of data rate) and stronger RF signal for the receiving device(s). To change the directionality of the RF signal when transmitting, a network node can control the phase and relative amplitude of the RF signal at each of the one or more transmitters that are broadcasting the RF signal. For example, a network node may use an array of antennas (referred to as a “phased array” or an “antenna array”) that creates a beam of RF waves that can be “steered” to point in different directions, without actually moving the antennas. Specifically, the RF current from the transmitter is fed to the individual antennas with the correct phase relationship so that the radio waves from the separate antennas add together to increase the radiation in a desired direction, while cancelling to suppress radiation in undesired directions.
[0059] Transmit beams may be quasi-co-located, meaning that they appear to the receiver (e.g., a UE) as having the same parameters, regardless of whether or not the transmitting antennas of the network node themselves are physically co-located. In NR, there are four types of quasi -co-1 ocati on (QCL) relations. Specifically, a QCL relation of a given type means that certain parameters about a second reference RF signal on a second beam can be derived from information about a source reference RF signal on a source beam. Thus, if the source reference RF signal is QCL Type A, the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel. If the source reference RF signal is QCL Type B, the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the Doppler shift and Doppler spread of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel. If the source reference RF signal is QCL Type C, the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the Doppler shift and average delay of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel. If the source reference RF signal is QCL Type D, the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the spatial receive parameter of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel.
[0060] In receive beamforming, the receiver uses a receive beam to amplify RF signals detected on a given channel. For example, the receiver can increase the gain setting and/or adjust the phase setting of an array of antennas in a particular direction to amplify (e.g., to increase the gain level of) the RF signals received from that direction. Thus, when a receiver is said to beamform in a certain direction, it means the beam gain in that direction is high relative to the beam gain along other directions, or the beam gain in that direction is the highest compared to the beam gain in that direction of all other receive beams available to the receiver. This results in a stronger received signal strength (e.g., reference signal received power (RSRP), reference signal received quality (RSRQ), signal -to- interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR), etc.) of the RF signals received from that direction.
[0061] Transmit and receive beams may be spatially related. A spatial relation means that parameters for a second beam (e.g., a transmit or receive beam) for a second reference signal can be derived from information about a first beam (e.g., a receive beam or a transmit beam) for a first reference signal. For example, a UE may use a particular receive beam to receive a reference downlink reference signal (e.g., synchronization signal block (SSB)) from a base station. The UE can then form a transmit beam for sending an uplink reference signal (e.g., sounding reference signal (SRS)) to that base station based on the parameters of the receive beam.
[0062] Note that a “downlink” beam may be either a transmit beam or a receive beam, depending on the entity forming it. For example, if a base station is forming the downlink beam to transmit a reference signal to a UE, the downlink beam is a transmit beam. If the UE is forming the downlink beam, however, it is a receive beam to receive the downlink reference signal. Similarly, an “uplink” beam may be either a transmit beam or a receive beam, depending on the entity forming it. For example, if a base station is forming the uplink beam, it is an uplink receive beam, and if a UE is forming the uplink beam, it is an uplink transmit beam. [0063] The electromagnetic spectrum is often subdivided, based on frequency/wavelength, into various classes, bands, channels, etc. In 5G NR two initial operating bands have been identified as frequency range designations FR1 (410 MHz - 7.125 GHz) and FR2 (24.25 GHz - 52.6 GHz). It should be understood that although a portion of FR1 is greater than 6 GHz, FR1 is often referred to (interchangeably) as a “Sub-6 GHz” band in various documents and articles. A similar nomenclature issue sometimes occurs with regard to FR2, which is often referred to (interchangeably) as a “millimeter wave” band in documents and articles, despite being different from the extremely high frequency (EHF) band (30 GHz - 300 GHz) which is identified by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU) as a “millimeter wave” band.
[0064] The frequencies between FR1 and FR2 are often referred to as mid-band frequencies. Recent 5G NR studies have identified an operating band for these mid-band frequencies as frequency range designation FR3 (7.125 GHz - 24.25 GHz). Frequency bands falling within FR3 may inherit FR1 characteristics and/or FR2 characteristics, and thus may effectively extend features of FR1 and/or FR2 into mid-band frequencies. In addition, higher frequency bands are currently being explored to extend 5G NR operation beyond 52.6 GHz. For example, three higher operating bands have been identified as frequency range designations FR4a or FR4-1 (52.6 GHz - 71 GHz), FR4 (52.6 GHz - 114.25 GHz), and FR5 (114.25 GHz - 300 GHz). Each of these higher frequency bands falls within the EHF band.
[0065] With the above aspects in mind, unless specifically stated otherwise, it should be understood that the term “sub-6 GHz” or the like if used herein may broadly represent frequencies that may be less than 6 GHz, may be within FR1, or may include mid-band frequencies. Further, unless specifically stated otherwise, it should be understood that the term “millimeter wave” or the like if used herein may broadly represent frequencies that may include mid-band frequencies, may be within FR2, FR4, FR4-a or FR4-1, and/or FR5, or may be within the EHF band.
[0066] In a multi-carrier system, such as 5G, one of the carrier frequencies is referred to as the “primary carrier” or “anchor carrier” or “primary serving cell” or “PCell,” and the remaining carrier frequencies are referred to as “secondary carriers” or “secondary serving cells” or “SCells.” In carrier aggregation, the anchor carrier is the carrier operating on the primary frequency (e.g., FR1) utilized by a UE 104/182 and the cell in which the UE 104/182 either performs the initial radio resource control (RRC) connection establishment procedure or initiates the RRC connection re-establishment procedure. The primary carrier carries all common and UE-specific control channels, and may be a carrier in a licensed frequency (however, this is not always the case). A secondary carrier is a carrier operating on a second frequency (e.g., FR2) that may be configured once the RRC connection is established between the UE 104 and the anchor carrier and that may be used to provide additional radio resources. In some cases, the secondary carrier may be a carrier in an unlicensed frequency. The secondary carrier may contain only necessary signaling information and signals, for example, those that are UE-specific may not be present in the secondary carrier, since both primary uplink and downlink carriers are typically UE-specific. This means that different UEs 104/182 in a cell may have different downlink primary carriers. The same is true for the uplink primary carriers. The network is able to change the primary carrier of any UE 104/182 at any time. This is done, for example, to balance the load on different carriers. Because a “serving cell” (whether a PCell or an SCell) corresponds to a carrier frequency / component carrier over which some base station is communicating, the term “cell,” “serving cell,” “component carrier,” “carrier frequency,” and the like can be used interchangeably.
[0067] For example, still referring to FIG. 1, one of the frequencies utilized by the macro cell base stations 102 may be an anchor carrier (or “PCell”) and other frequencies utilized by the macro cell base stations 102 and/or the mmW base station 180 may be secondary carriers (“SCells”). The simultaneous transmission and/or reception of multiple carriers enables the UE 104/182 to significantly increase its data transmission and/or reception rates. For example, two 20 MHz aggregated carriers in a multi-carrier system would theoretically lead to a two-fold increase in data rate (i.e., 40 MHz), compared to that attained by a single 20 MHz carrier.
[0068] The wireless communications system 100 may further include a UE 164 that may communicate with a macro cell base station 102 over a communication link 120 and/or the mmW base station 180 over a mmW communication link 184. For example, the macro cell base station 102 may support a PCell and one or more SCells for the UE 164 and the mmW base station 180 may support one or more SCells for the UE 164.
[0069] In some cases, the UE 164 and the UE 182 may be capable of sidelink communication. Sidelink-capable UEs (SL-UEs) may communicate with base stations 102 over communication links 120 using the Uu interface (i.e., the air interface between a UE and abase station). SL-UEs (e.g., UE 164, UE 182) may also communicate directly with each other over a wireless sidelink 160 using the PC5 interface (i.e., the air interface between sidelink-capable UEs). A wireless sidelink (or just “sidelink”) is an adaptation of the core cellular (e.g., LTE, NR) standard that allows direct communication between two or more UEs without the communication needing to go through a base station. Sidelink communication may be unicast or multicast, and may be used for device-to-device (D2D) media-sharing, vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication, vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication (e.g., cellular V2X (cV2X) communication, enhanced V2X (eV2X) communication, etc.), emergency rescue applications, etc. One or more of a group of SL- UEs utilizing sidelink communications may be within the geographic coverage area 110 of a base station 102. Other SL-UEs in such a group may be outside the geographic coverage area 110 of a base station 102 or be otherwise unable to receive transmissions from a base station 102. In some cases, groups of SL-UEs communicating via sidelink communications may utilize a one-to-many (1 :M) system in which each SL-UE transmits to every other SL-UE in the group. In some cases, a base station 102 facilitates the scheduling of resources for sidelink communications. In other cases, sidelink communications are carried out between SL-UEs without the involvement of a base station 102.
[0070] In an aspect, the sidelink 160 may operate over a wireless communication medium of interest, which may be shared with other wireless communications between other vehicles and/or infrastructure access points, as well as other RATs. A “medium” may be composed of one or more time, frequency, and/or space communication resources (e.g., encompassing one or more channels across one or more carriers) associated with wireless communication between one or more transmitter / receiver pairs. In an aspect, the medium of interest may correspond to at least a portion of an unlicensed frequency band shared among various RATs. Although different licensed frequency bands have been reserved for certain communication systems (e.g., by a government entity such as the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) in the United States), these systems, in particular those employing small cell access points, have recently extended operation into unlicensed frequency bands such as the Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (U-NII) band used by wireless local area network (WLAN) technologies, most notably IEEE 802.1 lx WLAN technologies generally referred to as “Wi-Fi.” Example systems of this type include different variants of CDMA systems, TDMA systems, FDMA systems, orthogonal FDMA (OFDMA) systems, single-carrier FDMA (SC-FDMA) systems, and so on.
[0071] Note that although FIG. 1 only illustrates two of the UEs as SL-UEs (i.e., UEs 164 and 182), any of the illustrated UEs may be SL-UEs. Further, although only UE 182 was described as being capable of beamforming, any of the illustrated UEs, including UE 164, may be capable of beamforming. Where SL-UEs are capable of beamforming, they may beamform towards each other (i.e., towards other SL-UEs), towards other UEs (e.g., UEs 104), towards base stations (e.g., base stations 102, 180, small cell 102’, access point 150), etc. Thus, in some cases, UEs 164 and 182 may utilize beamforming over sidelink 160.
[0072] In the example of FIG. 1, any of the illustrated UEs (shown in FIG. 1 as a single UE 104 for simplicity) may receive signals 124 from one or more Earth orbiting space vehicles (SVs) 112 (e.g., satellites). In an aspect, the S Vs 112 may be part of a satellite positioning system that aUE 104 can use as an independent source of location information. A satellite positioning system typically includes a system of transmitters (e.g., SVs 112) positioned to enable receivers (e.g., UEs 104) to determine their location on or above the Earth based, at least in part, on positioning signals (e.g., signals 124) received from the transmitters. Such a transmitter typically transmits a signal marked with a repeating pseudo-random noise (PN) code of a set number of chips. While typically located in SVs 112, transmitters may sometimes be located on ground-based control stations, base stations 102, and/or other UEs 104. A UE 104 may include one or more dedicated receivers specifically designed to receive signals 124 for deriving geo location information from the SVs 112.
[0073] In a satellite positioning system, the use of signals 124 can be augmented by various satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS) that may be associated with or otherwise enabled for use with one or more global and/or regional navigation satellite systems. For example an SBAS may include an augmentation system(s) that provides integrity information, differential corrections, etc., such as the Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS), the European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS), the Multifunctional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS), the Global Positioning System (GPS) Aided Geo Augmented Navigation or GPS and Geo Augmented Navigation system (GAGAN), and/or the like. Thus, as used herein, a satellite positioning system may include any combination of one or more global and/or regional navigation satellites associated with such one or more satellite positioning systems.
[0074] In an aspect, SVs 112 may additionally or alternatively be part of one or more nonterrestrial networks (NTNs). In an NTN, an SV 112 is connected to an earth station (also referred to as a ground station, NTN gateway, or gateway), which in turn is connected to an element in a 5G network, such as a modified base station 102 (without a terrestrial antenna) or a network node in a 5GC. This element would in turn provide access to other elements in the 5G network and ultimately to entities external to the 5G network, such as Internet web servers and other user devices. In that way, a UE 104 may receive communication signals (e.g., signals 124) from an SV 112 instead of, or in addition to, communication signals from a terrestrial base station 102.
[0075] The wireless communications system 100 may further include one or more UEs, such as UE 190, that connects indirectly to one or more communication networks via one or more device-to-device (D2D) peer-to-peer (P2P) links (referred to as “sidelinks”). In the example of FIG. 1, UE 190 has a D2D P2P link 192 with one of the UEs 104 connected to one of the base stations 102 (e.g., through which UE 190 may indirectly obtain cellular connectivity) and a D2D P2P link 194 with WLAN STA 152 connected to the WLAN AP 150 (through which UE 190 may indirectly obtain WLAN-based Internet connectivity). In an example, the D2D P2P links 192 and 194 may be supported with any well-known D2D RAT, such as LTE Direct (LTE-D), WiFi Direct (WiFi-D), Bluetooth®, and so on.
[0076] FIG. 2A illustrates an example wireless network structure 200. For example, a 5GC 210 (also referred to as a Next Generation Core (NGC)) can be viewed functionally as control plane (C-plane) functions 214 (e.g., UE registration, authentication, network access, gateway selection, etc.) and user plane (U-plane) functions 212, (e.g., UE gateway function, access to data networks, IP routing, etc.) which operate cooperatively to form the core network. User plane interface (NG-U) 213 and control plane interface (NG-C) 215 connect the gNB 222 to the 5GC 210 and specifically to the user plane functions 212 and control plane functions 214, respectively. In an additional configuration, an ng-eNB 224 may also be connected to the 5GC 210 via NG-C 215 to the control plane functions 214 and NG-U 213 to user plane functions 212. Further, ng-eNB 224 may directly communicate with gNB 222 via a backhaul connection 223. In some configurations, a Next Generation RAN (NG-RAN) 220 may have one or more gNBs 222, while other configurations include one or more of both ng-eNBs 224 and gNBs 222. Either (or both) gNB 222 or ng-eNB 224 may communicate with one or more UEs 204 (e.g., any of the UEs described herein).
[0077] Another optional aspect may include a location server 230, which may be in communication with the 5GC 210 to provide location assistance for UE(s) 204. The location server 230 can be implemented as a plurality of separate servers (e.g., physically separate servers, different software modules on a single server, different software modules spread across multiple physical servers, etc.), or alternately may each correspond to a single server. The location server 230 can be configured to support one or more location services for UEs 204 that can connect to the location server 230 via the core network, 5GC 210, and/or via the Internet (not illustrated). Further, the location server 230 may be integrated into a component of the core network, or alternatively may be external to the core network (e.g., a third party server, such as an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) server or service server).
[0078] FIG. 2B illustrates another example wireless network structure 240. A 5GC 260 (which may correspond to 5GC 210 in FIG. 2A) can be viewed functionally as control plane functions, provided by an access and mobility management function (AMF) 264, and user plane functions, provided by a user plane function (UPF) 262, which operate cooperatively to form the core network (i.e., 5GC 260). The functions of the AMF 264 include registration management, connection management, reachability management, mobility management, lawful interception, transport for session management (SM) messages between one or more UEs 204 (e.g., any of the UEs described herein) and a session management function (SMF) 266, transparent proxy services for routing SM messages, access authentication and access authorization, transport for short message service (SMS) messages between the UE 204 and the short message service function (SMSF) (not shown), and security anchor functionality (SEAF). The AMF 264 also interacts with an authentication server function (AUSF) (not shown) and the UE 204, and receives the intermediate key that was established as a result of the UE 204 authentication process. In the case of authentication based on a UMTS (universal mobile telecommunications system) subscriber identity module (USIM), the AMF 264 retrieves the security material from the AUSF. The functions of the AMF 264 also include security context management (SCM). The SCM receives a key from the SEAF that it uses to derive access-network specific keys. The functionality of the AMF 264 also includes location services management for regulatory services, transport for location services messages between the UE 204 and a location management function (LMF) 270 (which acts as a location server 230), transport for location services messages between the NG-RAN 220 and the LMF 270, evolved packet system (EPS) bearer identifier allocation for interworking with the EPS, and UE 204 mobility event notification. In addition, the AMF 264 also supports functionalities for non-3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project) access networks.
[0079] Functions of the UPF 262 include acting as an anchor point for intra-/inter-RAT mobility (when applicable), acting as an external protocol data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect to a data network (not shown), providing packet routing and forwarding, packet inspection, user plane policy rule enforcement (e.g., gating, redirection, traffic steering), lawful interception (user plane collection), traffic usage reporting, quality of service (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g., uplink/ downlink rate enforcement, reflective QoS marking in the downlink), uplink traffic verification (service data flow (SDF) to QoS flow mapping), transport level packet marking in the uplink and downlink, downlink packet buffering and downlink data notification triggering, and sending and forwarding of one or more “end markers” to the source RAN node. The UPF 262 may also support transfer of location services messages over a user plane between the UE 204 and a location server, such as an SLP 272.
[0080] The functions of the SMF 266 include session management, UE Internet protocol (IP) address allocation and management, selection and control of user plane functions, configuration of traffic steering at the UPF 262 to route traffic to the proper destination, control of part of policy enforcement and QoS, and downlink data notification. The interface over which the SMF 266 communicates with the AMF 264 is referred to as the Ni l interface.
[0081] Another optional aspect may include an LMF 270, which may be in communication with the 5GC 260 to provide location assistance for UEs 204. The LMF 270 can be implemented as a plurality of separate servers (e.g., physically separate servers, different software modules on a single server, different software modules spread across multiple physical servers, etc.), or alternately may each correspond to a single server. The LMF 270 can be configured to support one or more location services for UEs 204 that can connect to the LMF 270 via the core network, 5GC 260, and/or via the Internet (not illustrated). The SLP 272 may support similar functions to the LMF 270, but whereas the LMF 270 may communicate with the AMF 264, NG-RAN 220, and UEs 204 over a control plane (e.g., using interfaces and protocols intended to convey signaling messages and not voice or data), the SLP 272 may communicate with UEs 204 and external clients (e.g., third-party server 274) over a user plane (e.g., using protocols intended to carry voice and/or data like the transmission control protocol (TCP) and/or IP).
[0082] Yet another optional aspect may include a third-party server 274, which may be in communication with the LMF 270, the SLP 272, the 5GC 260 (e.g., via the AMF 264 and/or the UPF 262), the NG-RAN 220, and/or the UE 204 to obtain location information (e.g., a location estimate) for the UE 204. As such, in some cases, the third-party server 274 may be referred to as a location services (LCS) client or an external client. The third- party server 274 can be implemented as a plurality of separate servers (e.g., physically separate servers, different software modules on a single server, different software modules spread across multiple physical servers, etc.), or alternately may each correspond to a single server.
[0083] User plane interface 263 and control plane interface 265 connect the 5GC 260, and specifically the UPF 262 and AMF 264, respectively, to one or more gNBs 222 and/or ng-eNBs 224 in the NG-RAN 220. The interface between gNB(s) 222 and/or ng-eNB(s) 224 and the AMF 264 is referred to as the “N2” interface, and the interface between gNB(s) 222 and/or ng-eNB(s) 224 and the UPF 262 is referred to as the “N3” interface. The gNB(s) 222 and/or ng-eNB(s) 224 of the NG-RAN 220 may communicate directly with each other via backhaul connections 223, referred to as the “Xn-C” interface. One or more of gNBs 222 and/or ng-eNBs 224 may communicate with one or more UEs 204 over a wireless interface, referred to as the “Uu” interface.
[0084] The functionality of a gNB 222 may be divided between a gNB central unit (gNB-CU) 226, one or more gNB distributed units (gNB-DUs) 228, and one or more gNB radio units (gNB-RUs) 229. A gNB-CU 226 is a logical node that includes the base station functions of transferring user data, mobility control, radio access network sharing, positioning, session management, and the like, except for those functions allocated exclusively to the gNB-DU(s) 228. More specifically, the gNB-CU 226 generally host the radio resource control (RRC), service data adaptation protocol (SDAP), and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) protocols of the gNB 222. A gNB-DU 228 is a logical node that generally hosts the radio link control (RLC) and medium access control (MAC) layer of the gNB 222. Its operation is controlled by the gNB-CU 226. One gNB-DU 228 can support one or more cells, and one cell is supported by only one gNB-DU 228. The interface 232 between the gNB-CU 226 and the one or more gNB-DUs 228 is referred to as the “Fl” interface. The physical (PHY) layer functionality of a gNB 222 is generally hosted by one or more standalone gNB-RUs 229 that perform functions such as power amplification and signal transmission/reception. The interface between a gNB-DU 228 and a gNB-RU 229 is referred to as the “Fx” interface. Thus, a UE 204 communicates with the gNB-CU 226 via the RRC, SDAP, and PDCP layers, with a gNB-DU 228 via the RLC and MAC layers, and with a gNB-RU 229 via the PHY layer.
[0085] Deployment of communication systems, such as 5G NR systems, may be arranged in multiple manners with various components or constituent parts. In a 5G NR system, or network, a network node, a network entity, a mobility element of a network, a RAN node, a core network node, a network element, or a network equipment, such as a base station, or one or more units (or one or more components) performing base station functionality, may be implemented in an aggregated or disaggregated architecture. For example, a base station (such as a Node B (NB), evolved NB (eNB), NR base station, 5GNB, access point (AP), a transmit receive point (TRP), or a cell, etc.) may be implemented as an aggregated base station (also known as a standalone base station or a monolithic base station) or a disaggregated base station.
[0086] An aggregated base station may be configured to utilize a radio protocol stack that is physically or logically integrated within a single RAN node. A disaggregated base station may be configured to utilize a protocol stack that is physically or logically distributed among two or more units (such as one or more central or centralized units (CUs), one or more distributed units (DUs), or one or more radio units (RUs)). In some aspects, a CU may be implemented within a RAN node, and one or more DUs may be co-located with the CU, or alternatively, may be geographically or virtually distributed throughout one or multiple other RAN nodes. The DUs may be implemented to communicate with one or more RUs. Each of the CU, DU and RU also can be implemented as virtual units, i.e., a virtual central unit (VCU), a virtual distributed unit (VDU), or a virtual radio unit (VRU). [0087] Base station-type operation or network design may consider aggregation characteristics of base station functionality. For example, disaggregated base stations may be utilized in an integrated access backhaul (IAB) network, an open radio access network (0-RAN (such as the network configuration sponsored by the 0-RAN Alliance)), or a virtualized radio access network (vRAN, also known as a cloud radio access network (C-RAN)). Disaggregation may include distributing functionality across two or more units at various physical locations, as well as distributing functionality for at least one unit virtually, which can enable flexibility in network design. The various units of the disaggregated base station, or disaggregated RAN architecture, can be configured for wired or wireless communication with at least one other unit.
[0088] FIG. 2C illustrates an example disaggregated base station architecture 250, according to aspects of the disclosure. The disaggregated base station architecture 250 may include one or more central units (CUs) 280 (e.g., gNB-CU 226) that can communicate directly with a core network 267 (e.g., 5GC 210, 5GC 260) via a backhaul link, or indirectly with the core network 267 through one or more disaggregated base station units (such as a Near-Real Time (Near-RT) RAN Intelligent Controller (RIC) 259 via an E2 link, or a Non-Real Time (Non-RT) RIC 257 associated with a Service Management and Orchestration (SMO) Framework 255, or both). A CU 280 may communicate with one or more distributed units (DUs) 285 (e.g., gNB-DUs 228) via respective midhaul links, such as an Fl interface. The DUs 285 may communicate with one or more radio units (RUs) 287 (e.g., gNB-RUs 229) via respective fronthaul links. The RUs 287 may communicate with respective UEs 204 via one or more radio frequency (RF) access links. In some implementations, the UE 204 may be simultaneously served by multiple RUs 287.
[0089] Each of the units, i.e., the CUs 280, the DUs 285, the RUs 287, as well as the Near-RT RICs 259, the Non-RT RICs 257 and the SMO Framework 255, may include one or more interfaces or be coupled to one or more interfaces configured to receive or transmit signals, data, or information (collectively, signals) via a wired or wireless transmission medium. Each of the units, or an associated processor or controller providing instructions to the communication interfaces of the units, can be configured to communicate with one or more of the other units via the transmission medium. For example, the units can include a wired interface configured to receive or transmit signals over a wired transmission medium to one or more of the other units. Additionally, the units can include a wireless interface, which may include a receiver, a transmitter or transceiver (such as a radio frequency (RF) transceiver), configured to receive or transmit signals, or both, over a wireless transmission medium to one or more of the other units.
[0090] In some aspects, the CU 280 may host one or more higher layer control functions. Such control functions can include radio resource control (RRC), packet data convergence protocol (PDCP), service data adaptation protocol (SDAP), or the like. Each control function can be implemented with an interface configured to communicate signals with other control functions hosted by the CU 280. The CU 280 may be configured to handle user plane functionality (i.e., Central Unit - User Plane (CU-UP)), control plane functionality (i.e., Central Unit - Control Plane (CU-CP)), or a combination thereof. In some implementations, the CU 280 can be logically split into one or more CU-UP units and one or more CU-CP units. The CU-UP unit can communicate bidirectionally with the CU-CP unit via an interface, such as the El interface when implemented in an 0-RAN configuration. The CU 280 can be implemented to communicate with the DU 285, as necessary, for network control and signaling.
[0091] The DU 285 may correspond to a logical unit that includes one or more base station functions to control the operation of one or more RUs 287. In some aspects, the DU 285 may host one or more of a radio link control (RLC) layer, a medium access control (MAC) layer, and one or more high physical (PHY) layers (such as modules for forward error correction (FEC) encoding and decoding, scrambling, modulation and demodulation, or the like) depending, at least in part, on a functional split, such as those defined by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP). In some aspects, the DU 285 may further host one or more low PHY layers. Each layer (or module) can be implemented with an interface configured to communicate signals with other layers (and modules) hosted by the DU 285, or with the control functions hosted by the CU 280.
[0092] Lower-layer functionality can be implemented by one or more RUs 287. In some deployments, an RU 287, controlled by a DU 285, may correspond to a logical node that hosts RF processing functions, or low-PHY layer functions (such as performing fast Fourier transform (FFT), inverse FFT (iFFT), digital beamforming, physical random access channel (PRACH) extraction and filtering, or the like), or both, based at least in part on the functional split, such as a lower layer functional split. In such an architecture, the RU(s) 287 can be implemented to handle over the air (OTA) communication with one or more UEs 204. In some implementations, real-time and non-real-time aspects of control and user plane communication with the RU(s) 287 can be controlled by the corresponding DU 285. In some scenarios, this configuration can enable the DU(s) 285 and the CU 280 to be implemented in a cloud-based RAN architecture, such as a vRAN architecture.
[0093] The SMO Framework 255 may be configured to support RAN deployment and provisioning of non-virtualized and virtualized network elements. For non-virtualized network elements, the SMO Framework 255 may be configured to support the deployment of dedicated physical resources for RAN coverage requirements which may be managed via an operations and maintenance interface (such as an 01 interface). For virtualized network elements, the SMO Framework 255 may be configured to interact with a cloud computing platform (such as an open cloud (O-Cloud) 269) to perform network element life cycle management (such as to instantiate virtualized network elements) via a cloud computing platform interface (such as an 02 interface). Such virtualized network elements can include, but are not limited to, CUs 280, DUs 285, RUs 287 and Near-RT RICs 259. In some implementations, the SMO Framework 255 can communicate with a hardware aspect of a 4G RAN, such as an open eNB (O-eNB) 261, via an 01 interface. Additionally, in some implementations, the SMO Framework 255 can communicate directly with one or more RUs 287 via an 01 interface. The SMO Framework 255 also may include a Non-RT RIC 257 configured to support functionality of the SMO Framework 255.
[0094] The Non-RT RIC 257 may be configured to include a logical function that enables non- real-time control and optimization of RAN elements and resources, Artificial Intelligence/Machine Learning (AI/ML) workflows including model training and updates, or policy-based guidance of applications/features in the Near-RT RIC 259. The Non-RT RIC 257 may be coupled to or communicate with (such as via an Al interface) the Near-RT RIC 259. The Near-RT RIC 259 may be configured to include a logical function that enables near-real-time control and optimization of RAN elements and resources via data collection and actions over an interface (such as via an E2 interface) connecting one or more CUs 280, one or more DUs 285, or both, as well as an O-eNB, with the Near-RT RIC 259.
[0095] In some implementations, to generate AI/ML models to be deployed in the Near-RT RIC 259, the Non-RT RIC 257 may receive parameters or external enrichment information from external servers. Such information may be utilized by the Near-RT RIC 259 and may be received at the SMO Framework 255 or the Non-RT RIC 257 from non-network data sources or from network functions. In some examples, the Non-RT RIC 257 or the Near-RT RIC 259 may be configured to tune RAN behavior or performance. For example, the Non-RT RIC 257 may monitor long-term trends and patterns for performance and employ AI/ML models to perform corrective actions through the SMO Framework 255 (such as reconfiguration via 01) or via creation of RAN management policies (such as Al policies).
[0096] FIGS. 3A, 3B, and 3C illustrate several example components (represented by corresponding blocks) that may be incorporated into a UE 302 (which may correspond to any of the UEs described herein), a base station 304 (which may correspond to any of the base stations described herein), and a network entity 306 (which may correspond to or embody any of the network functions described herein, including the location server 230 and the LMF 270, or alternatively may be independent from the NG-RAN 220 and/or 5GC 210/260 infrastructure depicted in FIGS. 2 A and 2B, such as a private network) to support the operations described herein. It will be appreciated that these components may be implemented in different types of apparatuses in different implementations (e.g., in an ASIC, in a system-on-chip (SoC), etc.). The illustrated components may also be incorporated into other apparatuses in a communication system. For example, other apparatuses in a system may include components similar to those described to provide similar functionality. Also, a given apparatus may contain one or more of the components. For example, an apparatus may include multiple transceiver components that enable the apparatus to operate on multiple carriers and/or communicate via different technologies.
[0097] The UE 302 and the base station 304 each include one or more wireless wide area network (WWAN) transceivers 310 and 350, respectively, providing means for communicating (e.g., means for transmitting, means for receiving, means for measuring, means fortuning, means for refraining from transmitting, etc.) via one or more wireless communication networks (not shown), such as an NR network, an LTE network, a GSM network, and/or the like. The WWAN transceivers 310 and 350 may each be connected to one or more antennas 316 and 356, respectively, for communicating with other network nodes, such as other UEs, access points, base stations (e.g., eNBs, gNBs), etc., via at least one designated RAT (e.g., NR, LTE, GSM, etc.) over a wireless communication medium of interest (e.g., some set of time/frequency resources in a particular frequency spectrum). The WWAN transceivers 310 and 350 may be variously configured for transmitting and encoding signals 318 and 358 (e.g., messages, indications, information, and so on), respectively, and, conversely, for receiving and decoding signals 318 and 358 (e.g., messages, indications, information, pilots, and so on), respectively, in accordance with the designated RAT. Specifically, the WWAN transceivers 310 and 350 include one or more transmitters 314 and 354, respectively, for transmitting and encoding signals 318 and 358, respectively, and one or more receivers 312 and 352, respectively, for receiving and decoding signals 318 and 358, respectively.
[0098] The UE 302 and the base station 304 each also include, at least in some cases, one or more short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360, respectively. The short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 may be connected to one or more antennas 326 and 366, respectively, and provide means for communicating (e.g., means for transmitting, means for receiving, means for measuring, means for tuning, means for refraining from transmitting, etc.) with other network nodes, such as other UEs, access points, base stations, etc., via at least one designated RAT (e.g., WiFi, LTE-D, Bluetooth®, Zigbee®, Z-Wave®, PC5, dedicated short-range communications (DSRC), wireless access for vehicular environments (WAVE), near-field communication (NFC), ultra-wideband (UWB), etc.) over a wireless communication medium of interest. The short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 may be variously configured for transmitting and encoding signals 328 and 368 (e.g., messages, indications, information, and so on), respectively, and, conversely, for receiving and decoding signals 328 and 368 (e.g., messages, indications, information, pilots, and so on), respectively, in accordance with the designated RAT. Specifically, the short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 include one or more transmitters 324 and 364, respectively, for transmitting and encoding signals 328 and 368, respectively, and one or more receivers 322 and 362, respectively, for receiving and decoding signals 328 and 368, respectively. As specific examples, the short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 may be WiFi transceivers, Bluetooth® transceivers, Zigbee® and/or Z-Wave® transceivers, NFC transceivers, UWB transceivers, or vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) and/or vehicle-to-everything (V2X) transceivers.
[0099] The UE 302 and the base station 304 also include, at least in some cases, satellite signal receivers 330 and 370. The satellite signal receivers 330 and 370 may be connected to one or more antennas 336 and 376, respectively, and may provide means for receiving and/or measuring satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378, respectively. Where the satellite signal receivers 330 and 370 are satellite positioning system receivers, the satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378 may be global positioning system (GPS) signals, global navigation satellite system (GLONASS) signals, Galileo signals, Beidou signals, Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System (NAVIC), QuasiZenith Satellite System (QZSS), etc. Where the satellite signal receivers 330 and 370 are non-terrestrial network (NTN) receivers, the satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378 may be communication signals (e.g., carrying control and/or user data) originating from a 5G network. The satellite signal receivers 330 and 370 may comprise any suitable hardware and/or software for receiving and processing satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378, respectively. The satellite signal receivers 330 and 370 may request information and operations as appropriate from the other systems, and, at least in some cases, perform calculations to determine locations of the UE 302 and the base station 304, respectively, using measurements obtained by any suitable satellite positioning system algorithm.
[0100] The base station 304 and the network entity 306 each include one or more network transceivers 380 and 390, respectively, providing means for communicating (e.g., means for transmitting, means for receiving, etc.) with other network entities (e.g., other base stations 304, other network entities 306). For example, the base station 304 may employ the one or more network transceivers 380 to communicate with other base stations 304 or network entities 306 over one or more wired or wireless backhaul links. As another example, the network entity 306 may employ the one or more network transceivers 390 to communicate with one or more base station 304 over one or more wired or wireless backhaul links, or with other network entities 306 over one or more wired or wireless core network interfaces. [0101] A transceiver may be configured to communicate over a wired or wireless link. A transceiver (whether a wired transceiver or a wireless transceiver) includes transmitter circuitry (e.g., transmitters 314, 324, 354, 364) and receiver circuitry (e.g., receivers 312, 322, 352, 362). A transceiver may be an integrated device (e.g., embodying transmitter circuitry and receiver circuitry in a single device) in some implementations, may comprise separate transmitter circuitry and separate receiver circuitry in some implementations, or may be embodied in other ways in other implementations. The transmitter circuitry and receiver circuitry of a wired transceiver (e.g., network transceivers 380 and 390 in some implementations) may be coupled to one or more wired network interface ports. Wireless transmitter circuitry (e.g., transmitters 314, 324, 354, 364) may include or be coupled to a plurality of antennas (e.g., antennas 316, 326, 356, 366), such as an antenna array, that permits the respective apparatus (e.g., UE 302, base station 304) to perform transmit “beamforming,” as described herein. Similarly, wireless receiver circuitry (e.g., receivers 312, 322, 352, 362) may include or be coupled to a plurality of antennas (e.g., antennas 316, 326, 356, 366), such as an antenna array, that permits the respective apparatus (e.g., UE 302, base station 304) to perform receive beamforming, as described herein. In an aspect, the transmitter circuitry and receiver circuitry may share the same plurality of antennas (e.g., antennas 316, 326, 356, 366), such that the respective apparatus can only receive or transmit at a given time, not both at the same time. A wireless transceiver (e.g., WWAN transceivers 310 and 350, short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360) may also include a network listen module (NLM) or the like for performing various measurements.
[0102] As used herein, the various wireless transceivers (e.g., transceivers 310, 320, 350, and 360, and network transceivers 380 and 390 in some implementations) and wired transceivers (e.g., network transceivers 380 and 390 in some implementations) may generally be characterized as “a transceiver,” “at least one transceiver,” or “one or more transceivers.” As such, whether a particular transceiver is a wired or wireless transceiver may be inferred from the type of communication performed. For example, backhaul communication between network devices or servers will generally relate to signaling via a wired transceiver, whereas wireless communication between a UE (e.g., UE 302) and a base station (e.g., base station 304) will generally relate to signaling via a wireless transceiver. [0103] The UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 also include other components that may be used in conjunction with the operations as disclosed herein. The UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 include one or more processors 332, 384, and 394, respectively, for providing functionality relating to, for example, wireless communication, and for providing other processing functionality. The processors 332, 384, and 394 may therefore provide means for processing, such as means for determining, means for calculating, means for receiving, means for transmitting, means for indicating, etc. In an aspect, the processors 332, 384, and 394 may include, for example, one or more general purpose processors, multi-core processors, central processing units (CPUs), ASICs, digital signal processors (DSPs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), other programmable logic devices or processing circuitry, or various combinations thereof.
[0104] The UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 include memory circuitry implementing memories 340, 386, and 396 (e.g., each including a memory device), respectively, for maintaining information (e.g., information indicative of reserved resources, thresholds, parameters, and so on). The memories 340, 386, and 396 may therefore provide means for storing, means for retrieving, means for maintaining, etc. In some cases, the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 may include positioning component 342, 388, and 398, respectively. The positioning component 342, 388, and 398 may be hardware circuits that are part of or coupled to the processors 332, 384, and 394, respectively, that, when executed, cause the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 to perform the functionality described herein. In other aspects, the positioning component 342, 388, and 398 may be external to the processors 332, 384, and 394 (e.g., part of a modem processing system, integrated with another processing system, etc.). Alternatively, the positioning component 342, 388, and 398 may be memory modules stored in the memories 340, 386, and 396, respectively, that, when executed by the processors 332, 384, and 394 (or a modem processing system, another processing system, etc.), cause the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 to perform the functionality described herein. FIG. 3A illustrates possible locations of the positioning component 342, which may be, for example, part of the one or more WWAN transceivers 310, the memory 340, the one or more processors 332, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component. FIG. 3B illustrates possible locations of the positioning component 388, which may be, for example, part of the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the memory 386, the one or more processors 384, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component. FIG. 3C illustrates possible locations of the positioning component 398, which may be, for example, part of the one or more network transceivers 390, the memory 396, the one or more processors 394, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component.
[0105] The UE 302 may include one or more sensors 344 coupled to the one or more processors 332 to provide means for sensing or detecting movement and/or orientation information that is independent of motion data derived from signals received by the one or more WWAN transceivers 310, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 320, and/or the satellite signal receiver 330. By way of example, the sensor(s) 344 may include an accelerometer (e.g., a micro-electrical mechanical systems (MEMS) device), a gyroscope, a geomagnetic sensor (e.g., a compass), an altimeter (e.g., a barometric pressure altimeter), and/or any other type of movement detection sensor. Moreover, the sensor(s) 344 may include a plurality of different types of devices and combine their outputs in order to provide motion information. For example, the sensor(s) 344 may use a combination of a multi-axis accelerometer and orientation sensors to provide the ability to compute positions in two-dimensional (2D) and/or three-dimensional (3D) coordinate systems.
[0106] In addition, the UE 302 includes a user interface 346 providing means for providing indications (e.g., audible and/or visual indications) to a user and/or for receiving user input (e.g., upon user actuation of a sensing device such a keypad, a touch screen, a microphone, and so on). Although not shown, the base station 304 and the network entity 306 may also include user interfaces.
[0107] Referring to the one or more processors 384 in more detail, in the downlink, IP packets from the network entity 306 may be provided to the processor 384. The one or more processors 384 may implement functionality for an RRC layer, a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, a radio link control (RLC) layer, and a medium access control (MAC) layer. The one or more processors 384 may provide RRC layer functionality associated with broadcasting of system information (e.g., master information block (MIB), system information blocks (SIBs)), RRC connection control (e.g., RRC connection paging, RRC connection establishment, RRC connection modification, and RRC connection release), inter-RAT mobility, and measurement configuration for UE measurement reporting; PDCP layer functionality associated with header compression/decompression, security (ciphering, deciphering, integrity protection, integrity verification), and handover support functions; RLC layer functionality associated with the transfer of upper layer PDUs, error correction through automatic repeat request (ARQ), concatenation, segmentation, and reassembly of RLC service data units (SDUs), re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs, and reordering of RLC data PDUs; and MAC layer functionality associated with mapping between logical channels and transport channels, scheduling information reporting, error correction, priority handling, and logical channel prioritization.
[0108] The transmitter 354 and the receiver 352 may implement Layer- 1 (LI) functionality associated with various signal processing functions. Layer- 1, which includes a physical (PHY) layer, may include error detection on the transport channels, forward error correction (FEC) coding/decoding of the transport channels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping onto physical channels, modulation/demodulation of physical channels, and MIMO antenna processing. The transmitter 354 handles mapping to signal constellations based on various modulation schemes (e.g., binary phase-shift keying (BPSK), quadrature phase-shift keying (QPSK), M-phase-shift keying (M-PSK), M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM)). The coded and modulated symbols may then be split into parallel streams. Each stream may then be mapped to an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) subcarrier, multiplexed with a reference signal (e.g., pilot) in the time and/or frequency domain, and then combined together using an inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) to produce a physical channel carrying a time domain OFDM symbol stream. The OFDM symbol stream is spatially precoded to produce multiple spatial streams. Channel estimates from a channel estimator may be used to determine the coding and modulation scheme, as well as for spatial processing. The channel estimate may be derived from a reference signal and/or channel condition feedback transmitted by the UE 302. Each spatial stream may then be provided to one or more different antennas 356. The transmitter 354 may modulate an RF carrier with a respective spatial stream for transmission.
[0109] At the UE 302, the receiver 312 receives a signal through its respective antenna(s) 316. The receiver 312 recovers information modulated onto an RF carrier and provides the information to the one or more processors 332. The transmitter 314 and the receiver 312 implement Lay er- 1 functionality associated with various signal processing functions. The receiver 312 may perform spatial processing on the information to recover any spatial streams destined for the UE 302. If multiple spatial streams are destined for the UE 302, they may be combined by the receiver 312 into a single OFDM symbol stream. The receiver 312 then converts the OFDM symbol stream from the time-domain to the frequency domain using a fast Fourier transform (FFT). The frequency domain signal comprises a separate OFDM symbol stream for each subcarrier of the OFDM signal. The symbols on each subcarrier, and the reference signal, are recovered and demodulated by determining the most likely signal constellation points transmitted by the base station 304. These soft decisions may be based on channel estimates computed by a channel estimator. The soft decisions are then decoded and de-interleaved to recover the data and control signals that were originally transmitted by the base station 304 on the physical channel. The data and control signals are then provided to the one or more processors 332, which implements Layer-3 (L3) and Layer-2 (L2) functionality.
[0110] In the downlink, the one or more processors 332 provides demultiplexing between transport and logical channels, packet reassembly, deciphering, header decompression, and control signal processing to recover IP packets from the core network. The one or more processors 332 are also responsible for error detection.
[0111] Similar to the functionality described in connection with the downlink transmission by the base station 304, the one or more processors 332 provides RRC layer functionality associated with system information (e.g., MIB, SIBs) acquisition, RRC connections, and measurement reporting; PDCP layer functionality associated with header compression/decompression, and security (ciphering, deciphering, integrity protection, integrity verification); REC layer functionality associated with the transfer of upper layer PDUs, error correction through ARQ, concatenation, segmentation, and reassembly of RLC SDUs, re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs, and reordering of RLC data PDUs; and MAC layer functionality associated with mapping between logical channels and transport channels, multiplexing of MAC SDUs onto transport blocks (TBs), demultiplexing of MAC SDUs from TBs, scheduling information reporting, error correction through hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ), priority handling, and logical channel prioritization. [0112] Channel estimates derived by the channel estimator from a reference signal or feedback transmitted by the base station 304 may be used by the transmitter 314 to select the appropriate coding and modulation schemes, and to facilitate spatial processing. The spatial streams generated by the transmitter 314 may be provided to different antenna(s) 316. The transmitter 314 may modulate an RF carrier with a respective spatial stream for transmission.
[0113] The uplink transmission is processed at the base station 304 in a manner similar to that described in connection with the receiver function at the UE 302. The receiver 352 receives a signal through its respective antenna(s) 356. The receiver 352 recovers information modulated onto an RF carrier and provides the information to the one or more processors 384.
[0114] In the uplink, the one or more processors 384 provides demultiplexing between transport and logical channels, packet reassembly, deciphering, header decompression, control signal processing to recover IP packets from the UE 302. IP packets from the one or more processors 384 may be provided to the core network. The one or more processors 384 are also responsible for error detection.
[0115] For convenience, the UE 302, the base station 304, and/or the network entity 306 are shown in FIGS. 3 A, 3B, and 3C as including various components that may be configured according to the various examples described herein. It will be appreciated, however, that the illustrated components may have different functionality in different designs. In particular, various components in FIGS. 3A to 3C are optional in alternative configurations and the various aspects include configurations that may vary due to design choice, costs, use of the device, or other considerations. For example, in case of FIG. 3A, a particular implementation of UE 302 may omit the WWAN transceiver(s) 310 (e.g., a wearable device or tablet computer or PC or laptop may have Wi-Fi and/or Bluetooth capability without cellular capability), or may omit the short-range wireless transceiver s) 320 (e.g., cellular-only, etc.), or may omit the satellite signal receiver 330, or may omit the sensor(s) 344, and so on. In another example, in case of FIG. 3B, a particular implementation of the base station 304 may omit the WWAN transceiver(s) 350 (e.g., a Wi-Fi “hotspot” access point without cellular capability), or may omit the short-range wireless transceiver( s) 360 (e.g., cellular-only, etc.), or may omit the satellite signal receiver 370, and so on. For brevity, illustration of the various alternative configurations is not provided herein, but would be readily understandable to one skilled in the art.
[0116] The various components of the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 may be communicatively coupled to each other over data buses 334, 382, and 392, respectively. In an aspect, the data buses 334, 382, and 392 may form, or be part of, a communication interface of the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306, respectively. For example, where different logical entities are embodied in the same device (e.g., gNB and location server functionality incorporated into the same base station 304), the data buses 334, 382, and 392 may provide communication between them.
[0117] The components of FIGS. 3A, 3B, and 3C may be implemented in various ways. In some implementations, the components of FIGS. 3 A, 3B, and 3C may be implemented in one or more circuits such as, for example, one or more processors and/or one or more ASICs (which may include one or more processors). Here, each circuit may use and/or incorporate at least one memory component for storing information or executable code used by the circuit to provide this functionality. For example, some or all of the functionality represented by blocks 310 to 346 may be implemented by processor and memory component(s) of the UE 302 (e.g., by execution of appropriate code and/or by appropriate configuration of processor components). Similarly, some or all of the functionality represented by blocks 350 to 388 may be implemented by processor and memory component(s) of the base station 304 (e.g., by execution of appropriate code and/or by appropriate configuration of processor components). Also, some or all of the functionality represented by blocks 390 to 398 may be implemented by processor and memory component(s) of the network entity 306 (e.g., by execution of appropriate code and/or by appropriate configuration of processor components). For simplicity, various operations, acts, and/or functions are described herein as being performed “by a UE,” “by a base station,” “by a network entity,” etc. However, as will be appreciated, such operations, acts, and/or functions may actually be performed by specific components or combinations of components of the UE 302, base station 304, network entity 306, etc., such as the processors 332, 384, 394, the transceivers 310, 320, 350, and 360, the memories 340, 386, and 396, the positioning component 342, 388, and 398, etc.
[0118] In some designs, the network entity 306 may be implemented as a core network component. In other designs, the network entity 306 may be distinct from a network operator or operation of the cellular network infrastructure (e.g., NG RAN 220 and/or 5GC 210/260). For example, the network entity 306 may be a component of a private network that may be configured to communicate with the UE 302 via the base station 304 or independently from the base station 304 (e.g., over a non-cellular communication link, such as WiFi).
[0119] NR supports a number of cellular network-based positioning technologies, including downlink-based, uplink-based, and downlink-and-uplink-based positioning methods. Downlink-based positioning methods include observed time difference of arrival (OTDOA) in LTE, downlink time difference of arrival (DL-TDOA) in NR, and downlink angle-of-departure (DL-AoD) in NR. FIG. 4 illustrates examples of various positioning methods, according to aspects of the disclosure. In an OTDOA or DL-TDOA positioning procedure, illustrated by scenario 410, a UE measures the differences between the times of arrival (ToAs) of reference signals (e.g., positioning reference signals (PRS)) received from pairs of base stations, referred to as reference signal time difference (RSTD) or time difference of arrival (TDOA) measurements, and reports them to a positioning entity. More specifically, the UE receives the identifiers (IDs) of a reference base station (e.g., a serving base station) and multiple non-reference base stations in assistance data. The UE then measures the RSTD between the reference base station and each of the non-reference base stations. Based on the known locations of the involved base stations and the RSTD measurements, the positioning entity (e.g., the UE for UE-based positioning or a location server for UE-assisted positioning) can estimate the UE’s location.
[0120] For DL-AoD positioning, illustrated by scenario 420, the positioning entity uses a measurement report from the UE of received signal strength measurements of multiple downlink transmit beams to determine the angle(s) between the UE and the transmitting base station(s). The positioning entity can then estimate the location of the UE based on the determined angle(s) and the known location(s) of the transmitting base station(s).
[0121] Uplink-based positioning methods include uplink time difference of arrival (UL-TDOA) and uplink angle-of-arrival (UL-AoA). UL-TDOA is similar to DL-TDOA, but is based on uplink reference signals (e.g., sounding reference signals (SRS)) transmitted by the UE to multiple base stations. Specifically, a UE transmits one or more uplink reference signals that are measured by a reference base station and a plurality of non-reference base stations. Each base station then reports the reception time (referred to as the relative time of arrival (RTOA)) of the reference signal(s) to a positioning entity (e.g., a location server) that knows the locations and relative timing of the involved base stations. Based on the reception-to-reception (Rx-Rx) time difference between the reported RTOA of the reference base station and the reported RTOA of each non-reference base station, the known locations of the base stations, and their known timing offsets, the positioning entity can estimate the location of the UE using TDOA.
[0122] For UL-AoA positioning, one or more base stations measure the received signal strength of one or more uplink reference signals (e.g., SRS) received from a UE on one or more uplink receive beams. The positioning entity uses the signal strength measurements and the angle(s) of the receive beam(s) to determine the angle(s) between the UE and the base station(s). Based on the determined angle(s) and the known location(s) of the base station(s), the positioning entity can then estimate the location of the UE.
[0123] Downlink-and-uplink-based positioning methods include enhanced cell-ID (E-CID) positioning and multi -round-trip-time (RTT) positioning (also referred to as “multi-cell RTT” and “multi -RTT”). In an RTT procedure, a first entity (e.g., a base station or a UE) transmits a first RTT-related signal (e.g., a PRS or SRS) to a second entity (e.g., a UE or base station), which transmits a second RTT-related signal (e.g., an SRS or PRS) back to the first entity. Each entity measures the time difference between the time of arrival (ToA) of the received RTT-related signal and the transmission time of the transmitted RTT-related signal. This time difference is referred to as a reception-to-transmission (Rx- Tx) time difference. The Rx-Tx time difference measurement may be made, or may be adjusted, to include only a time difference between nearest slot boundaries for the received and transmitted signals. Both entities may then send their Rx-Tx time difference measurement to a location server (e.g., an LMF 270), which calculates the round trip propagation time (i.e., RTT) between the two entities from the two Rx-Tx time difference measurements (e.g., as the sum of the two Rx-Tx time difference measurements). Alternatively, one entity may send its Rx-Tx time difference measurement to the other entity, which then calculates the RTT. The distance between the two entities can be determined from the RTT and the known signal speed (e.g., the speed of light). For multi- RTT positioning, illustrated by scenario 430, a first entity (e.g., a UE or base station) performs an RTT positioning procedure with multiple second entities (e.g., multiple base stations or UEs) to enable the location of the first entity to be determined (e.g., using multilateration) based on distances to, and the known locations of, the second entities. RTT and multi-RTT methods can be combined with other positioning techniques, such as UL-AoA and DL-AoD, to improve location accuracy, as illustrated by scenario 440.
[0124] The E-CID positioning method is based on radio resource management (RRM) measurements. In E-CID, the UE reports the serving cell ID, the timing advance (TA), and the identifiers, estimated timing, and signal strength of detected neighbor base stations. The location of the UE is then estimated based on this information and the known locations of the base station(s).
[0125] To assist positioning operations, a location server (e.g., location server 230, LMF 270, SLP 272) may provide assistance data to the UE. For example, the assistance data may include identifiers of the base stations (or the cells/TRPs of the base stations) from which to measure reference signals, the reference signal configuration parameters (e.g., the number of consecutive slots including PRS, periodicity of the consecutive slots including PRS, muting sequence, frequency hopping sequence, reference signal identifier, reference signal bandwidth, etc.), and/or other parameters applicable to the particular positioning method. Alternatively, the assistance data may originate directly from the base stations themselves (e.g., in periodically broadcasted overhead messages, etc.). In some cases, the UE may be able to detect neighbor network nodes itself without the use of assistance data.
[0126] In the case of an OTDOA or DL-TDOA positioning procedure, the assistance data may further include an expected RSTD value and an associated uncertainty, or search window, around the expected RSTD. In some cases, the value range of the expected RSTD may be +/- 500 microseconds (ps). In some cases, when any of the resources used for the positioning measurement are in FR1, the value range for the uncertainty of the expected RSTD may be +/- 32 ps. In other cases, when all of the resources used for the positioning measurement(s) are in FR2, the value range for the uncertainty of the expected RSTD may be +/- 8 ps.
[0127] A location estimate may be referred to by other names, such as a position estimate, location, position, position fix, fix, or the like. A location estimate may be geodetic and comprise coordinates (e.g., latitude, longitude, and possibly altitude) or may be civic and comprise a street address, postal address, or some other verbal description of a location. A location estimate may further be defined relative to some other known location or defined in absolute terms (e.g., using latitude, longitude, and possibly altitude). A location estimate may include an expected error or uncertainty (e.g., by including an area or volume within which the location is expected to be included with some specified or default level of confidence).
[0128] Various frame structures may be used to support downlink and uplink transmissions between network nodes (e.g., base stations and UEs). FIG. 5 is a diagram 500 illustrating an example frame structure, according to aspects of the disclosure. The frame structure may be a downlink or uplink frame structure. Other wireless communications technologies may have different frame structures and/or different channels.
[0129] LTE, and in some cases NR, utilizes orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) on the downlink and single-carrier frequency division multiplexing (SC-FDM) on the uplink. Unlike LTE, however, NR has an option to use OFDM on the uplink as well. OFDM and SC-FDM partition the system bandwidth into multiple (K) orthogonal subcarriers, which are also commonly referred to as tones, bins, etc. Each subcarrier may be modulated with data. In general, modulation symbols are sent in the frequency domain with OFDM and in the time domain with SC-FDM. The spacing between adjacent subcarriers may be fixed, and the total number of subcarriers (K) may be dependent on the system bandwidth. For example, the spacing of the subcarriers may be 15 kilohertz (kHz) and the minimum resource allocation (resource block) may be 12 subcarriers (or 180 kHz). Consequently, the nominal fast Fourier transform (FFT) size may be equal to 128, 256, 512, 1024, or 2048 for system bandwidth of 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, or 20 megahertz (MHz), respectively. The system bandwidth may also be partitioned into subbands. For example, a subband may cover 1.08 MHz (i.e., 6 resource blocks), and there may be 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 subbands for system bandwidth of 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, or 20 MHz, respectively.
[0130] LTE supports a single numerology (subcarrier spacing (SCS), symbol length, etc.). In contrast, NR may support multiple numerologies (p), for example, subcarrier spacings of 15 kHz (p=0), 30 kHz (p=l), 60 kHz (p=2), 120 kHz (p=3), and 240 kHz (p=4) or greater may be available. In each subcarrier spacing, there are 14 symbols per slot. For 15 kHz SCS (p=0), there is one slot per subframe, 10 slots per frame, the slot duration is 1 millisecond (ms), the symbol duration is 66.7 microseconds (ps), and the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 50. For 30 kHz SCS (p=l), there are two slots per subframe, 20 slots per frame, the slot duration is 0.5 ms, the symbol duration is 33.3 ps, and the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 100. For 60 kHz SCS (p=2), there are four slots per subframe, 40 slots per frame, the slot duration is 0.25 ms, the symbol duration is 16.7 ps, and the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 200. For 120 kHz SCS (p=3), there are eight slots per subframe, 80 slots per frame, the slot duration is 0.125 ms, the symbol duration is 8.33 ps, and the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 400. For 240 kHz SCS (p=4), there are 16 slots per subframe, 160 slots per frame, the slot duration is 0.0625 ms, the symbol duration is 4.17 ps, and the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 800.
[0131] In the example of FIG. 5, a numerology of 15 kHz is used. Thus, in the time domain, a 10 ms frame is divided into 10 equally sized subframes of 1 ms each, and each subframe includes one time slot. In FIG. 5, time is represented horizontally (on the X axis) with time increasing from left to right, while frequency is represented vertically (on the Y axis) with frequency increasing (or decreasing) from bottom to top.
[0132] A resource grid may be used to represent time slots, each time slot including one or more time-concurrent resource blocks (RBs) (also referred to as physical RBs (PRBs)) in the frequency domain. The resource grid is further divided into multiple resource elements (REs). An RE may correspond to one symbol length in the time domain and one subcarrier in the frequency domain. In the numerology of FIG. 5, for a normal cyclic prefix, an RB may contain 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain and seven consecutive symbols in the time domain, for a total of 84 REs. For an extended cyclic prefix, an RB may contain 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain and six consecutive symbols in the time domain, for a total of 72 REs. The number of bits carried by each RE depends on the modulation scheme.
[0133] Some of the REs may carry reference (pilot) signals (RS). The reference signals may include positioning reference signals (PRS), tracking reference signals (TRS), phase tracking reference signals (PTRS), cell-specific reference signals (CRS), channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DMRS), primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondary synchronization signals (SSS), synchronization signal blocks (SSBs), sounding reference signals (SRS), etc., depending on whether the illustrated frame structure is used for uplink or downlink communication. FIG. 5 illustrates example locations of REs carrying a reference signal (labeled “R”). [0134] A collection of resource elements (REs) that are used for transmission of PRS is referred to as a “PRS resource.” The collection of resource elements can span multiple PRBs in the frequency domain and ‘N’ (such as 1 or more) consecutive symbol(s) within a slot in the time domain. In a given OFDM symbol in the time domain, a PRS resource occupies consecutive PRBs in the frequency domain.
[0135] The transmission of a PRS resource within a given PRB has a particular comb size (also referred to as the “comb density”). A comb size ‘N’ represents the subcarrier spacing (or frequency/tone spacing) within each symbol of a PRS resource configuration. Specifically, for a comb size ‘N,’ PRS are transmitted in every Nth subcarrier of a symbol of a PRB. For example, for comb-4, for each symbol of the PRS resource configuration, REs corresponding to every fourth subcarrier (such as subcarriers 0, 4, 8) are used to transmit PRS of the PRS resource. Currently, comb sizes of comb-2, comb-4, comb-6, and comb- 12 are supported for DL-PRS. FIG. 5 illustrates an example PRS resource configuration for comb-4 (which spans four symbols). That is, the locations of the shaded REs (labeled “R”) indicate a comb-4 PRS resource configuration.
[0136] Currently, a DL-PRS resource may span 2, 4, 6, or 12 consecutive symbols within a slot with a fully frequency-domain staggered pattern. A DL-PRS resource can be configured in any higher layer configured downlink or flexible (FL) symbol of a slot. There may be a constant energy per resource element (EPRE) for all REs of a given DL-PRS resource. The following are the frequency offsets from symbol to symbol for comb sizes 2, 4, 6, and 12 over 2, 4, 6, and 12 symbols. 2-symbol comb-2: {0, 1 }; 4-symbol comb-2: {0, 1, 0, 1 }; 6-symbol comb-2: {0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1 }; 12-symbol comb-2: {0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1 }; 4-symbol comb-4: {0, 2, 1, 3} (as in the example of FIG. 5); 12-symbol comb-4: {0, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 1, 3}; 6-symbol comb-6: {0, 3, 1, 4, 2, 5}; 12-symbol comb-6: {0, 3, 1, 4, 2, 5, 0, 3, 1, 4, 2, 5}; and 12-symbol comb-12: {0, 6, 3, 9, 1, 7, 4, 10, 2, 8, 5, H }.
[0137] A “PRS resource set” is a set of PRS resources used for the transmission of PRS signals, where each PRS resource has a PRS resource ID. In addition, the PRS resources in a PRS resource set are associated with the same TRP. A PRS resource set is identified by a PRS resource set ID and is associated with a particular TRP (identified by a TRP ID). In addition, the PRS resources in a PRS resource set have the same periodicity, a common muting pattern configuration, and the same repetition factor (such as “PRS- ResourceRepetitionF actor”) across slots. The periodicity is the time from the first repetition of the first PRS resource of a first PRS instance to the same first repetition of the same first PRS resource of the next PRS instance. The periodicity may have a length selected from 2Ap*{4, 5, 8, 10, 16, 20, 32, 40, 64, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5120, 10240} slots, with p = 0, 1, 2, 3. The repetition factor may have a length selected from { 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 16, 32} slots.
[0138] A PRS resource ID in a PRS resource set is associated with a single beam (or beam ID) transmitted from a single TRP (where a TRP may transmit one or more beams). That is, each PRS resource of a PRS resource set may be transmitted on a different beam, and as such, a “PRS resource,” or simply “resource,” also can be referred to as a “beam.” Note that this does not have any implications on whether the TRPs and the beams on which PRS are transmitted are known to the UE.
[0139] A “PRS instance” or “PRS occasion” is one instance of a periodically repeated time window (such as a group of one or more consecutive slots) where PRS are expected to be transmitted. A PRS occasion also may be referred to as a “PRS positioning occasion,” a “PRS positioning instance, a “positioning occasion,” “a positioning instance,” a “positioning repetition,” or simply an “occasion,” an “instance,” or a “repetition.”
[0140] A “positioning frequency layer” (also referred to simply as a “frequency layer”) is a collection of one or more PRS resource sets across one or more TRPs that have the same values for certain parameters. Specifically, the collection of PRS resource sets has the same subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix (CP) type (meaning all numerologies supported for the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) are also supported for PRS), the same Point A, the same value of the downlink PRS bandwidth, the same start PRB (and center frequency), and the same comb-size. The Point A parameter takes the value of the parameter “ARFCN-ValueNR” (where “ARFCN” stands for “absolute radio-frequency channel number”) and is an identifier/code that specifies a pair of physical radio channel used for transmission and reception. The downlink PRS bandwidth may have a granularity of four PRBs, with a minimum of 24 PRBs and a maximum of 272 PRBs. Currently, up to four frequency layers have been defined, and up to two PRS resource sets may be configured per TRP per frequency layer.
[0141] The concept of a frequency layer is somewhat like the concept of component carriers and bandwidth parts (BWPs), but different in that component carriers and BWPs are used by one base station (or a macro cell base station and a small cell base station) to transmit data channels, while frequency layers are used by several (usually three or more) base stations to transmit PRS. A UE may indicate the number of frequency layers it can support when it sends the network its positioning capabilities, such as during an LTE positioning protocol (LPP) session. For example, a UE may indicate whether it can support one or four positioning frequency layers.
[0142] Note that the terms “positioning reference signal” and “PRS” generally refer to specific reference signals that are used for positioning in NR and LTE systems. However, as used herein, the terms “positioning reference signal” and “PRS” may also refer to any type of reference signal that can be used for positioning, such as but not limited to, PRS as defined in LTE and NR, TRS, PTRS, CRS, CSLRS, DMRS, PSS, SSS, SSB, SRS, UL-PRS, etc. In addition, the terms “positioning reference signal” and “PRS” may refer to downlink, uplink, or sidelink positioning reference signals, unless otherwise indicated by the context. If needed to further distinguish the type of PRS, a downlink positioning reference signal may be referred to as a “DL-PRS,” an uplink positioning reference signal (e.g., an SRS-for-positioning, PTRS) may be referred to as an “UL-PRS,” and a sidelink positioning reference signal may be referred to as an “SL-PRS.” In addition, for signals that may be transmitted in the downlink, uplink, and/or sidelink (e.g., DMRS), the signals may be prepended with “DL,” “UL,” or “SL” to distinguish the direction. For example, “UL-DMRS” is different from “DL-DMRS .”
[0143] FIG. 6 is a diagram 600 illustrating an example PRS configuration for two TRPs (labeled “TRP1” and “TRP2”) operating in the same positioning frequency layer (labeled “Positioning Frequency Layer 1”), according to aspects of the disclosure. For a positioning session, a UE may be provided with assistance data indicating the illustrated PRS configuration. In the example of FIG. 6, the first TRP (“TRP1”) is associated with (e.g., transmits) two PRS resource sets, labeled “PRS Resource Set 1” and “PRS Resource Set 2,” and the second TRP (“TRP2”) is associated with one PRS resource set, labeled “PRS Resource Set 3.” Each PRS resource set comprises at least two PRS resources. Specifically, the first PRS resource set (“PRS Resource Set 1”) includes PRS resources labeled “PRS Resource 1” and “PRS Resource 2,” the second PRS resource set (“PRS Resource Set 2”) includes PRS resources labeled “PRS Resource 3” and “PRS Resource 4,” and the third PRS resource set (“PRS Resource Set 3”) includes PRS resources labeled “PRS Resource 5” and “PRS Resource 6.”
[0144] When a UE is configured in the assistance data of a positioning method with a number of PRS resources beyond its capability, the UE assumes the PRS resources in the assistance data are sorted in a decreasing order of measurement priority. Currently, the 64 TRPs per frequency layer are sorted according to priority and the two PRS resource sets per TRP of the frequency layer are sorted according to priority. However, the four frequency layers may or may not be sorted according to priority, and the 64 PRS resources of the PRS resource set per TRP per frequency layer may or may not be sorted according to priority. The reference indicated by the assistance data parameter “nr-DL-PRS- Referencelnfo” for each frequency layer has the highest priority, at least for DL-TDOA positioning procedures.
[0145] FIG. 7 is a diagram of an example PRS configuration 700 for the PRS transmissions of a given base station, according to aspects of the disclosure. In FIG. 7, time is represented horizontally, increasing from left to right. Each long rectangle represents a slot and each short (shaded) rectangle represents an OFDM symbol. In the example of FIG. 7, a PRS resource set 710 (labeled “PRS resource set 1”) includes two PRS resources, a first PRS resource 712 (labeled “PRS resource 1”) and a second PRS resource 714 (labeled “PRS resource 2”). The base station transmits PRS on the PRS resources 712 and 714 of the PRS resource set 710.
[0146] The PRS resource set 710 has an occasion length (N PRS) of two slots and a periodicity (T PRS) of, for example, 160 slots or 160 milliseconds (ms) (for 15 kHz subcarrier spacing). As such, both the PRS resources 712 and 714 are two consecutive slots in length and repeat every T PRS slots, starting from the slot in which the first symbol of the respective PRS resource occurs. In the example of FIG. 7, the PRS resource 712 has a symbol length (N_symb) of two symbols, and the PRS resource 714 has a symbol length (N_symb) of four symbols. The PRS resource 712 and the PRS resource 714 may be transmitted on separate beams of the same base station.
[0147] Each instance of the PRS resource set 710, illustrated as instances 720a, 720b, and 720c, includes an occasion of length ‘2’ (i.e., N_PRS=2) for each PRS resource 712, 714 of the PRS resource set. The PRS resources 712 and 714 are repeated every T PRS slots up to the muting sequence periodicity T REP. As such, a bitmap of length T REP would be needed to indicate which occasions of instances 720a, 720b, and 720c of PRS resource set 710 are muted (i.e., not transmitted).
[0148] In an aspect, there may be additional constraints on the PRS configuration 700. For example, for all PRS resources (e.g., PRS resources 712, 714) of a PRS resource set (e.g., PRS resource set 710), the base station can configure the following parameters to be the same: (a) the occasion length (N_PRS), (b) the number of symbols (N_symb), (c) the comb type, and/or (d) the bandwidth. In addition, for all PRS resources of all PRS resource sets, the subcarrier spacing and the cyclic prefix can be configured to be the same for one base station or for all base stations. Whether it is for one base station or all base stations may depend on the UE’s capability to support the first and/or second option.
[0149] A cellular repeater is used to improve network connectivity. A repeater commonly includes a donor antenna that receives downlink signals from nearby base stations and a rebroadcast antenna that transmits the downlink signals to one or more UEs. On the uplink, the rebroadcast antenna receives uplink signals from the one or more UEs and the donor antenna transmits the signals to the nearby base stations. Repeater communication can increase throughput, data rate, and cellular coverage, and is especially beneficial due to its ability to increase the diversity gain in a fading environment.
[0150] FIGS. 8A to 8D illustrate the differences between a repeater function and a relay function, as well as some technical challenges faced by conventional repeater and relay functions. As used herein, the generic term repeater/relay unit (RU) is used to refer to a network node that performs a repeater function, a relay function, or both. Where the RU does a particular function, repeater or relay, that will be so indicated.
[0151] FIG. 8A shows a repeater function, in which a repeater receives a first signal (labeled “X”) from a transmitter node (labeled “Nl”) and sends a second signal (labeled “X”’) to a receiver node (labeled “N2”). In this scenario, the repeater essentially regenerates the signal X as X’, for example, by duplicating the tones of X. From a signal processing point of view, X and X’ would appear the same at the receiver node N2.
[0152] In one example, the transmitter node Nl may be a gNB and the receiver node N2 may be a UE, in which case, the connection between the gNB and the repeater is referred to as a fronthaul link, while the connection between the repeater and the UE is referred to as an access link. Thus, the examples illustrated in FIGS. 8 A to 8D are referred to as integrated access fronthaul (IAF) networks. [0153] FIG. 8B shows a relay function, in which a relay node receives a first signal (labeled “X”) from a transmitter node (labeled “Nl”) and generates a second signal (labeled “Y”), which carries information about or from the first signal X. The relay node does not replicate the tones of the original signal X, but instead, contains essentially the same content as the first signal X, but in a different form (represented as “f(X)”). As a downlink example, signal X may be a front-haul physical downlink shared channel (FH-PDSCH) having a payload that carries some information (e.g., IQ samples), and signal Y may be a legacy PDSCH that is generated based upon that information. As an uplink example, signal X may be a legacy physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) and signal Y may be a fronthaul physical uplink shared channel (FH-PUSCH) having a payload that carries some information acquired from signal X.
[0154] FIG. 8C shows the repeater of FIG. 8 A, but with the roles of the transmitter node XI and receiver node X2 reversed. Similarly, FIG. 8D shows the relay of FIG. 8C, but with the roles of the transmitter node XI and receiver node X2 reversed.
[0155] A repeater may serve as a PRS transmission point. If a repeater can repeat (or reflect or relay) a PRS, then the positioning entity can use the repeater as an anchor node (i.e., a transmitter with a known location) for positioning a target UE. FIG. 9 is a diagram 900 illustrating an example wireless environment in which a base station is transmitting PRS to UEs in various geographical areas, according to aspects of the disclosure. Specifically, a base station 902 is transmitting a first PRS (labeled “PRS1”) towards a first UE 904-1 (labeled “UE1”) in a first region 910-1 (labeled “Region 1”), a second PRS (labeled “PRS2”) towards a repeater 920, and a third PRS (labeled “PRS3”) towards a second UE 904-2 (labeled “UE2”) in a second region 910-2 (labeled “Region 2”). The repeater 920 is configured to repeat (or reflect or relay) “PRS2” towards the second UE 904-2 and a third UE 904-3 (labeled “UE3”) in a third region 910-3 (labeled “Region 3”).
[0156] Thus, in the example of FIG. 9, regions 910-1 and 910-2 are within the direct coverage area of the base station 902, while region 910-3 is out of direct coverage of the base station 902. In addition, region 910-2 is within the coverage area of both the base station 902 and the repeater 920. UEs within only the coverage area of the repeater 920 (e.g., UE 904-3) may be referred to as “remote” UEs.
[0157] Note that while FIG. 9 illustrates a single UE 904 in each region 910, as will be appreciated, there may be more than one UE 904 in a region 910. In addition, while FIG. 9 illustrates the base station 902 transmitting three PRS (e.g., PRS resources) on three downlink transmit beams, respectively, as will be appreciated, there may be more or fewer than three PRS and three beams.
[0158] As shown in FIG. 9, a UE may be able to receive PRS only from a base station (e.g., UE 904-1), or may be able to receive PRS only from a repeater (e.g., UE 904-3), or may be able to receive PRS from both a base station and a repeater (e.g., UE 904-2). In the latter case, the SSB/PRS from the base station and the repeater may be the same or different.
[0159] A repeater may cause interference and confusion for other base stations and/or UEs. In addition, when positioning a UE, it is important to determine whether the target UE is measuring PRS from abase station or a repeater, as the difference will affect, for example, the time-of-flight (ToF) calculation. As such, it would be beneficial to have a mechanisms to properly configure or turn off a repeater’s PRS transmission in order to determine within which coverage area a target UE is located (e.g., within the coverage area of a base station, a repeater, or both).
[0160] The present disclosure provides techniques for resolving ambiguity in cases of repeaterbased positioning. FIG. 10 is a diagram 1000 illustrating an example wireless environment in which a base station is beam sweeping PRS resources to multiple UEs, according to aspects of the disclosure. In the example of FIG. 10, for downlink-based positioning, a base station 1002 (e.g., any of the base stations described herein) is configured to beam sweep N PRS resources on N downlink transmit beams. More specifically, the base station 1002 is configured to transmit at least the first PRS resource (labeled “PRS 1”) towards a second UE 1004-2 (labeled “UE2”) and at least the Nth PRS resource (labeled “PRS N”) towards a first UE 1004-1 (labeled “UE1”).
[0161] The base station 1002 is further configured to transmit multiple PRS resources towards a repeater 1020 (e.g., any of the repeaters described herein). In the example of FIG. 10, the base station 1002 transmits PRS resources n+1 and n+2 (labeled “PRS n+1” and “PRS n+2”) towards the repeater 1020, but as will be appreciated, the base station 1002 may transmit more than two PRS resources towards the repeater 1020. Note that the base station 1002 transmits multiple PRS resources towards the repeater 1020 to enable the repeater 1020 to beam sweep the received PRS resources. In addition, while FIG. 10 illustrates the base station 1002 transmitting PRS resources n+1 and n+2 on different beams, they may instead be transmitted on the same beam. [0162] The repeater 1020 forwards the received subset of PRS resources on the access link (i.e., PRS resources n+1 and n+2). As will be appreciated, there may be some time delay between the reception of the PRS resources n+1 and n+2 at the repeater 1020 and the subsequent transmission of the PRS resources n+1 and n+2 by the repeater 1020. This may be due to the hardware limitations of the repeater 1020 in receiving, amplifying, and forwarding the PRS resources.
[0163] In the above scenario, a UE (e.g., any of UEs 1004) may be configured with positioning assistance data (e.g., in an LPP Provide Assistance Data message from the LMF 270) for one or both of the base station 1002 and the repeater 1020. More specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 6, the assistance data may include the PRS resources associated with a first TRP (here, base station 1002) and a second TRP (here, repeater 1020). For the first TRP indicated in the assistance data (base station 1002), the assistance data may include the set of PRS resources {PRS 1, ..., PRS n, PRS n+3, ..., PRS N}. For the second TRP (repeater 1020), the assistance data may include the set of PRS resources {PRS n+1, PRS n+2}. Thus, from the perspective of the UE, there are two TRPs, one transmitting N - 2 PRS resources (i.e., PRS resources {PRS 1, ..., PRS n, PRS n+3, ..., PRS N}) and the other transmitting two PRS resources (i.e., PRS resources {PRS n+1, PRS n+2}).
[0164] This assistance data configuration would allow a UE to collect measurements with and without the repeater 1020. That is, a UE within the coverage area of only the base station 1002 (e.g., UE 1004-1) would be able to measure PRS resources in the set {PRS 1, ..., PRS n, PRS n+3, ..., PRS N}, while a UE within the coverage area of only the repeater 1020 (e.g., UE 1004-3) would be able to measure PRS resources in the set {PRS n+1, PRS n+2}. These UE’s may be able to detect PRS resources in the other set, but the signal strength would likely be very low, and the measurement(s) could be rejected (e.g., by the network) as an outlier.
[0165] In contrast, a UE in the coverage area of both the base station 1002 and the repeater 1020 (e.g., UE 1004-2) would likely be able to measure PRS resources in both sets {PRS 1, ..., PRS n, PRS n+3, ..., PRS N} and {PRS n+1, PRS n+2}. On the network side, by determining which PRS resources the respective UEs measured and reported (e.g., in an LPP Provide Location Information message), the UEs’ coverage cases can be determined. [0166] To prevent the repeater 1020 from repeating PRS resources in the set {PRS 1, ..., PRS n, PRS n+3, ..., PRS N}, the repeater 1020 may be turned OFF during the time instances (e.g., symbols) that PRS resources {PRS 1, PRS n, PRS n+3, PRS N{ are transmitted by the base station 1002 and turned ON during the time instances that PRS resources {PRS n+1, PRS n+2} are transmitted by the base station 1002.
[0167] The base station’s 1002 beam sweep of PRS resource set {PRS 1, PRS n, PRS n+3,
PRS N{ and the repeater’s 1020 beam sweep of PRS resource set {PRS n+1, PRS n+2{ should be on consecutive symbols/slots. That is, the repeater 1020 should transmit PRS resources {PRS n+1, PRS n+2{ in the symbols or slots immediately following the symbols or slots on which the base station 1002 transmitted PRS resources {PRS 1, ..., PRS n, PRS n+3, ..., PRS N}, rather than simply after whatever delay is caused by the repeater’s 1020 hardware. In that way, the two PRS resource sets will be within the channel coherence time (the time during which the UE can expect the channel to remain the same) and any measured difference would be due to the repeater’s 1020 ON-OFF pattern.
[0168] For uplink-based positioning, the repeater 1020 should be turned OFF so that the base station 1002 can perform only direct measurements from the UEs 1004.
[0169] When a repeater is available, as in the example of FIG. 10, some entity in the network needs to determine whether the repeater should be used for positioning and the configuration (e.g., PRS configuration, ON-OFF pattern, etc.) to use. For downlink-based positioning, the location server (e.g., LMF 270) can configure/reconfigure/turn off a TRP via, for example, a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message. The configuration may include parameters such as bandwidth, periodicity, repetition factor, etc.
[0170] A DU (e.g., DU 285) can also configure/reconfigure/turn off a TRP. If available, a DU should consider the location server’s request to configure/reconfigure/turn off a TRP and carry out the request if possible.
[0171] For uplink-based positioning, the location server can indicate which TRPs should perform SRS measurements via, for example, an NRPPa Measurement Request message. Thus, the location server can indicate that a repeater TRP (e.g., repeater 1020) is turned OFF during uplink positioning reference signal transmissions (e.g., SRS). A DU should consider the location server’s request and fulfill it if possible.
[0172] Currently, a location server cannot request the time resources on which a TRP should transmit PRS resources. Thus, with continued reference to FIG. 10, a location server currently cannot request that the base station’s 1002 beam sweep of PRS resource set {PRS 1, PRS n, PRS n+3, PRS N} and the repeater’s 1020 beam sweep of PRS resource set {PRS n+1, PRS n+2} be on consecutive symbols/slots.
[0173] Accordingly, the present disclosure proposes to enable the location server to indicate the time-domain resources to be used for PRS transmission. For example, the location server may indicate the start symbol, or symbol offset, of a PRS resource within a slot. This would allow the location server to indicate PRS configurations with overlapping and/or consecutive PRS resources transmitted and/or forwards by a TRP (including a repeater). This would also allow the location server to specify muting patterns for PRS resources transmitted or forwarded by the TRPs.
[0174] When a repeater is in the coverage area of multiple potential donor TRPs (e.g., base station 1002), the location server may indicate which TRP should be the donor TRP for the repeater. In that way, different PRS resource sets forwarded by a repeater may come from (be associated with) different donor TRPs. Non-donor TRPs should be configured to orthogonalize their transmissions to the transmissions of the donor TRP so that the repeater can be configured to not repeat the transmissions from the non-donor TRPs. For example, the non-donor TRPs may transmit on different time and/or frequency resources than the donor TRP.
[0175] As shown in FIG. 10, if base station 1002 needs to communicate with UE 1004-3 and vice versa, irrespective of positioning operations, the communication must go through the repeater 1020. The base station 1002 therefore needs to configure the repeater 1020 to be ON when transmitting to the UE 1004-3 or receiving from the UE 1004-3. However, the base station 1002 first needs to determine whether the repeater 1020 is needed in order to communicate with the UE 1004-3.
[0176] Accordingly, as another technique to determine whether a UE is in the coverage area of a repeater (a direct, indirect, or overlapping coverage region), a serving base station (e.g., base station 1002) may make such a determination based on multiple measurements of uplink channel state reference signals (e.g., SRS, etc.). Specifically, the base station 1002 may obtain measurements of the uplink reference signal(s) during periods of time when the repeater 1020 is ON and periods of time when the repeater 1020 is OFF. If the signal strength of the uplink reference signal(s) is higher when the repeater 1020 is ON versus when it is OFF, the base station 1002 can determine that the base station 1002 needs the repeater 1020 to be ON when communicating with the UE (e.g., UE 1004-3).
[0177] Alternatively, or additionally, the serving base station (e.g., base station 1002) may determine whether the UE is in the coverage area of the repeater based on measurement reports of downlink channel state reference signals (e.g., CSI-RS, PRS, etc.) obtained by the UE. Specifically, the UE may obtain measurements of the downlink reference signal(s) during periods of time when the repeater 1020 is ON and periods of time when the repeater 1020 is OFF. If the signal strength of the downlink reference signal (s) is higher when the repeater 1020 is ON versus when it is OFF, the base station 1002 can determine that the base station 1002 needs the repeater 1020 to be ON when communicating with the UE (e.g., UE 1004-3).
[0178] Note, to make the determination, the base station 1002 may need to configure the UE to transmit more instances of the channel state reference signal(s) than it normally would in order to test instances with the repeater 1020 OFF and ON.
[0179] For positioning purposes, it would be beneficial for the serving base station to report to the location server that it is communicating with a UE (e.g., UE 1004-3) via a repeater. Accordingly, the present disclosure proposes signaling to enable a serving base station to report, to the location server, an indication of the repeater associated with a particular UE and/or the type of coverage region of a UE (e.g., direct, indirect, or overlapping). Thus, with reference to FIG. 10, where the base station 1002 is the serving base station for UEs 1004, the base station 1002 may report to the location server that UE 1004-1 is in direct coverage of the base station 1002, UE 1004-2 is in overlapping coverage of the base station 1002 (i.e., is within the coverage area of both the base station 1002 and the repeater 1020), and UE 1004-3 is in indirect coverage of the base station 1002. For UEs 1004-2 and 1004-3, the base station 1002 may also report an identifier or some other indication of the repeater 1020.
[0180] Currently, a location server may use an E-CID procedure to request a serving base station for the coarse location of a UE. In the E-CID positioning method, the UE position is estimated based on the knowledge of the geographical coordinates of the UE’s serving ng-eNB or gNB. As an example, the E-CID procedure can be extended to enable the reporting of the type of coverage of a UE and/or the identifier of a repeater used to communicate with a UE. [0181] FIG. 11 illustrates example E-CID measurement procedures between an NG-RAN node 1120 (e.g., a gNB 222 or an ng-eNB 224) and an LMF 270, according to aspects of the disclosure. Specifically, FIG. 11 illustrates an E-CID measurement initiation procedure 1100 and an E-CID measurement report procedure 1150 performed over NRPPa signaling.
[0182] The purpose of the E-CID measurement initiation procedure 1100 is to allow the LMF 270 to request the NG-RAN node 1120 to report E-CID measurements used by the LMF 270 to compute the location of a UE. As shown in FIG. 11, the LMF 270 initiates the E- CID measurement initiation procedure 1100 by sending an E-CID MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message. If the NG-RAN node 1120 is able to initiate the requested E-CID measurements, it replies with an E-CID MEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE message that includes the requested information (to the extent known/available).
[0183] The purpose of the E-CID measurement report procedure 1150 is for the NG-RAN node 1120 to provide the E-CID measurements for the UE to the LMF 270. As shown in FIG. 11, the NG-RAN node 1120 initiates the E-CID measurement report procedure 1150 by sending an E-CID MEASUREMENT REPORT message. The E-CID MEASUREMENT REPORT message contains the E-CID measurement results according to the measurement configuration in the respective E-CID MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message.
[0184] The “Measured Results” information element (IE) is included in the “E-CID Measurement Result” IE of the E-CID MEASUREMENT REPORT message when measurement results other than the ‘Cell-ID’ have been requested. If available, the NG- RAN node 1120 includes the “NG-RAN Access Point Position” IE or the “Geographical Coordinates” IE, which is the configured estimated serving antenna position in the “E- CID Measurement Result” IE within the E-CID MEASUREMENT REPORT message. Upon reception of this “NG-RAN Access Point Position” IE, the LMF 270 may use the value as the geographical position of the NG-RAN access point. If available, the NG- RAN node 1120 includes the “Cell Portion ID” IE in the E-CID MEASUREMENT REPORT message. Upon reception of the “Cell Portion ID” IE, the LMF 270 may use the value as the cell portion for the measurement. [0185] The “Cell Portion ID” field indicates the portion of a cell in which the UE is located. The present disclosure proposes to extend an E-CID MEASUREMENT REPORT to include different Cell Portion IDs associated with a repeater’s or TRP’s coverage regions. That is, an additional Cell Portion ID may be added/included for each repeater associated with the reporting base station (e.g., repeater 1020 in the example of FIG. 10).
[0186] FIG. 12 illustrates an example method 1200 of communication, according to aspects of the disclosure. In an aspect, method 1200 may be performed by a location server (e.g., LMF 270).
[0187] At 1210, the location server transmits, to a network node, a PRS configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node. In an aspect, operation 1210 may be performed by the one or more network transceivers 390, the one or more processors 394, memory 396, and/or positioning component 398, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
[0188] At 1220, the location server receives, from at least one UE, a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both. In an aspect, operation 1220 may be performed by the one or more network transceivers 390, the one or more processors 394, memory 396, and/or positioning component 398, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
[0189] FIG. 13 illustrates an example method 1300 of communication, according to aspects of the disclosure. In an aspect, method 1300 may be performed by a location server (e.g., LMF 270).
[0190] At 1310, the location server transmits, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater. In an aspect, operation 1310 may be performed by the one or more network transceivers 390, the one or more processors 394, memory 396, and/or positioning component 398, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
[0191] At 1320, the location server transmits, to the first network node, a first PRS configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater. In an aspect, operation 1320 may be performed by the one or more network transceivers 390, the one or more processors 394, memory 396, and/or positioning component 398, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
[0192] FIG. 14 illustrates an example method 1400 of communication, according to aspects of the disclosure. In an aspect, method 1400 may be performed by a network node (e.g., a base station, TRP, cell, CU, DU, etc.).
[0193] At 1410, the network node configures a UE (e.g., any of the UEs described herein) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances. In an aspect, operation 1410 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
[0194] At 1420, the network node configures a repeater (e.g., repeater 1020) associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances. In an aspect, operation 1420 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more network transceivers 380, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
[0195] At 1430, the network node attempts to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater. In an aspect, operation 1430 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
[0196] At 1440, the network node attempts to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater. In an aspect, operation 1440 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
[0197] At 1450, the network node transmits, to a location server (e.g., LMF 270), an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both. In an aspect, operation 1450 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more network transceivers 380, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
[0198] FIG. 15 illustrates an example method 1500 of communication, according to aspects of the disclosure. In an aspect, method 1500 may be performed by a network node (e.g., a base station, TRP, cell, CU, DU, etc.).
[0199] At 1510, the network node configures a UE (e.g., any of the UEs described herein) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances. In an aspect, operation 1510 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
[0200] At 1520, the network node configures a repeater (e.g., repeater 1020) associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances. In an aspect, operation 1520 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
[0201] At 1530, the network node receives one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both. In an aspect, operation 1530 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
[0202] At 1540, the network node transmits, to a location server (e.g., LMF 270), an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both. In an aspect, operation 1540 may be performed by the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 360, the one or more processors 384, memory 386, and/or positioning component 388, any or all of which may be considered means for performing this operation.
[0203] As will be appreciated, a technical advantage of the methods 1200 to 1500 is improved ambiguity resolution in cases of repeater-based positioning and thereby more accurate and reliable estimation of the UE’s position.
[0204] In the detailed description above it can be seen that different features are grouped together in examples. This manner of disclosure should not be understood as an intention that the example clauses have more features than are explicitly mentioned in each clause. Rather, the various aspects of the disclosure may include fewer than all features of an individual example clause disclosed. Therefore, the following clauses should hereby be deemed to be incorporated in the description, wherein each clause by itself can stand as a separate example. Although each dependent clause can refer in the clauses to a specific combination with one of the other clauses, the aspect(s) of that dependent clause are not limited to the specific combination. It will be appreciated that other example clauses can also include a combination of the dependent clause aspect(s) with the subject matter of any other dependent clause or independent clause or a combination of any feature with other dependent and independent clauses. The various aspects disclosed herein expressly include these combinations, unless it is explicitly expressed or can be readily inferred that a specific combination is not intended (e.g., contradictory aspects, such as defining an element as both an electrical insulator and an electrical conductor). Furthermore, it is also intended that aspects of a clause can be included in any other independent clause, even if the clause is not directly dependent on the independent clause. [0205] Implementation examples are described in the following numbered clauses:
[0206] Clause 1. A method of communication performed by a location server, comprising: transmitting, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and receiving, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
[0207] Clause 2. The method of clause 1, wherein the first set of time resources and the second set of time resources are consecutive time resources or overlapping time resources.
[0208] Clause 3. The method of any of clauses 1 to 2, further comprising: determining whether the at least one UE is within a coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report.
[0209] Clause 4. The method of clause 3, wherein: the at least one UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report including measurements of the second set of PRS resources, or the at least one UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report not including measurements of the second set of PRS resources.
[0210] Clause 5. The method of any of clauses 1 to 4, wherein the network node is configured to beam sweep at least the first set of PRS resources.
[0211] Clause 6. The method of any of clauses 1 to 5, further comprising: receiving, from the network node, an indication that the repeater is associated with the network node, a coverage area of the repeater, a repeater associated with the UE, a coverage area associated with the UE.
[0212] Clause 7. The method of clause 6, wherein the indication is received in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message. [0213] Clause 8. The method of clause 7, wherein the indication is received in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
[0214] Clause 9. The method of any of clauses 6 to 8, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
[0215] Clause 10. The method of any of clauses 1 to 9, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
[0216] Clause 11. The method of any of clauses 1 to 10, further comprising: transmitting, to the UE, positioning assistance data for the plurality of PRS resources, wherein the positioning assistance data indicates the first set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the first set of time-domain resources and the second set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the second set of time-domain resources.
[0217] Clause 12. The method of any of clauses 1 to 11, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0218] Clause 13. A method of communication performed by a location server, comprising: transmitting, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and transmitting, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
[0219] Clause 14. The method of clause 13, further comprising: transmitting, to the first network node, a second message configuring a second donor for the repeater; and transmitting, to the first network node, a second PRS configuration for one or more second PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the second donor towards the repeater.
[0220] Clause 15. The method of clause 14, wherein the first PRS resource set and the second PRS resource set are non-overlapping in time, frequency, or both.
[0221] Clause 16. The method of any of clauses 13 to 15, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message. [0222] Clause 17. The method of any of clauses 13 to 16, wherein the first network node is: a base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0223] Clause 18. The method of any of clauses 13 to 17, wherein the first donor is: a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the first network node, or a cell supported by the first network node.
[0224] Clause 19. A method of communication performed by a network node, comprising: configuring a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; attempting to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; attempting to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0225] Clause 20. The method of clause 19, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than the signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances.
[0226] Clause 21. The method of any of clauses 19 to 20, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0227] Clause 22. The method of any of clauses 19 to 21, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained. [0228] Clause 23. The method of any of clauses 19 to 22, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
[0229] Clause 24. The method of clause 23, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
[0230] Clause 25. The method of any of clauses 19 to 24, wherein the uplink reference signal comprises a sounding reference signal (SRS).
[0231] Clause 26. The method of any of clauses 19 to 25, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
[0232] Clause 27. The method of any of clauses 19 to 26, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0233] Clause 28. A method of communication performed by a network node, comprising: configuring a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; receiving one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0234] Clause 29. The method of clause 28, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on signal strengths of the measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than signal strengths of the measurements of the second subset of instances. [0235] Clause 30. The method of any of clauses 28 to 29, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0236] Clause 31. The method of any of clauses 28 to 30, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0237] Clause 32. The method of any of clauses 28 to 31, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
[0238] Clause 33. The method of clause 32, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
[0239] Clause 34. The method of any of clauses 28 to 33, wherein the downlink reference signal comprises a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS).
[0240] Clause 35. The method of any of clauses 28 to 34, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
[0241] Clause 36. The method of any of clauses 28 to 35, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0242] Clause 37. A location server, comprising: one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and receive, via the one or more transceivers, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
[0243] Clause 38. The location server of clause 37, wherein the first set of time resources and the second set of time resources are consecutive time resources or overlapping time resources.
[0244] Clause 39. The location server of any of clauses 37 to 38, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to: determine whether the at least one UE is within a coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report.
[0245] Clause 40. The location server of clause 39, wherein: the at least one UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report including measurements of the second set of PRS resources, or the at least one UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report not including measurements of the second set of PRS resources.
[0246] Clause 41. The location server of any of clauses 37 to 40, wherein the network node is configured to beam sweep at least the first set of PRS resources.
[0247] Clause 42. The location server of any of clauses 37 to 41, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to: receive, via the one or more transceivers, from the network node, an indication that the repeater is associated with the network node, a coverage area of the repeater, a repeater associated with the UE, a coverage area associated with the UE.
[0248] Clause 43. The location server of clause 42, wherein the indication is received in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
[0249] Clause 44. The location server of clause 43, wherein the indication is received in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
[0250] Clause 45. The location server of any of clauses 42 to 44, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
[0251] Clause 46. The location server of any of clauses 37 to 45, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
[0252] Clause 47. The location server of any of clauses 37 to 46, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the UE, positioning assistance data for the plurality of PRS resources, wherein the positioning assistance data indicates the first set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the first set of time-domain resources and the second set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the second set of time-domain resources.
[0253] Clause 48. The location server of any of clauses 37 to 47, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0254] Clause 49. A location server, comprising: one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
[0255] Clause 50. The location server of clause 49, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the first network node, a second message configuring a second donor for the repeater; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the first network node, a second PRS configuration for one or more second PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the second donor towards the repeater.
[0256] Clause 51. The location server of clause 50, wherein the first PRS resource set and the second PRS resource set are non-overlapping in time, frequency, or both.
[0257] Clause 52. The location server of any of clauses 49 to 51, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
[0258] Clause 53. The location server of any of clauses 49 to 52, wherein the first network node is: a base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0259] Clause 54. The location server of any of clauses 49 to 53, wherein the first donor is: a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the first network node, or a cell supported by the first network node. [0260] Clause 55. A network node, comprising: one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: configure a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; attempt to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; attempt to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0261] Clause 56. The network node of clause 55, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than the signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances.
[0262] Clause 57. The network node of any of clauses 55 to 56, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0263] Clause 58. The network node of any of clauses 55 to 57, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0264] Clause 59. The network node of any of clauses 55 to 58, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
[0265] Clause 60. The network node of clause 59, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message. [0266] Clause 61. The network node of any of clauses 55 to 60, wherein the uplink reference signal comprises a sounding reference signal (SRS).
[0267] Clause 62. The network node of any of clauses 55 to 61, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
[0268] Clause 63. The network node of any of clauses 55 to 62, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0269] Clause 64. A network node, comprising: one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: configure a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; receive, via the one or more transceivers, one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0270] Clause 65. The network node of clause 64, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on signal strengths of the measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than signal strengths of the measurements of the second subset of instances. [0271] Clause 66. The network node of any of clauses 64 to 65, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0272] Clause 67. The network node of any of clauses 64 to 66, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0273] Clause 68. The network node of any of clauses 64 to 67, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
[0274] Clause 69. The network node of clause 68, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
[0275] Clause 70. The network node of any of clauses 64 to 69, wherein the downlink reference signal comprises a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS).
[0276] Clause 71. The network node of any of clauses 64 to 70, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
[0277] Clause 72. The network node of any of clauses 64 to 71, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0278] Clause 73. A location server, comprising: means for transmitting, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of timedomain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and means for receiving, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both. [0279] Clause 74. The location server of clause 73, wherein the first set of time resources and the second set of time resources are consecutive time resources or overlapping time resources.
[0280] Clause 75. The location server of any of clauses 73 to 74, further comprising: means for determining whether the at least one UE is within a coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report.
[0281] Clause 76. The location server of clause 75, wherein: the at least one UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report including measurements of the second set of PRS resources, or the at least one UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report not including measurements of the second set of PRS resources.
[0282] Clause 77. The location server of any of clauses 73 to 76, wherein the network node is configured to beam sweep at least the first set of PRS resources.
[0283] Clause 78. The location server of any of clauses 73 to 77, further comprising: means for receiving, from the network node, an indication that the repeater is associated with the network node, a coverage area of the repeater, a repeater associated with the UE, a coverage area associated with the UE.
[0284] Clause 79. The location server of clause 78, wherein the indication is received in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
[0285] Clause 80. The location server of clause 79, wherein the indication is received in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
[0286] Clause 81. The location server of any of clauses 78 to 80, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
[0287] Clause 82. The location server of any of clauses 73 to 81, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
[0288] Clause 83. The location server of any of clauses 73 to 82, further comprising: means for transmitting, to the UE, positioning assistance data for the plurality of PRS resources, wherein the positioning assistance data indicates the first set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the first set of time-domain resources and the second set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the second set of time-domain resources. [0289] Clause 84. The location server of any of clauses 73 to 83, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0290] Clause 85. A location server, comprising: means for transmitting, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and means for transmitting, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
[0291] Clause 86. The location server of clause 85, further comprising: means for transmitting, to the first network node, a second message configuring a second donor for the repeater; and means for transmitting, to the first network node, a second PRS configuration for one or more second PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the second donor towards the repeater.
[0292] Clause 87. The location server of clause 86, wherein the first PRS resource set and the second PRS resource set are non-overlapping in time, frequency, or both.
[0293] Clause 88. The location server of any of clauses 85 to 87, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
[0294] Clause 89. The location server of any of clauses 85 to 88, wherein the first network node is: a base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0295] Clause 90. The location server of any of clauses 85 to 89, wherein the first donor is: a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the first network node, or a cell supported by the first network node.
[0296] Clause 91. A network node, comprising: means for configuring a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; means for configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; means for attempting to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; means for attempting to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and means for transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0297] Clause 92. The network node of clause 91, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than the signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances.
[0298] Clause 93. The network node of any of clauses 91 to 92, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0299] Clause 94. The network node of any of clauses 91 to 93, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0300] Clause 95. The network node of any of clauses 91 to 94, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
[0301] Clause 98. The network node of any of clauses 91 to 97, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
[0302] Clause 99. The network node of any of clauses 91 to 98, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0303] Clause 100. A network node, comprising: means for configuring a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; means for configuring a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; means for receiving one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and means for transmitting, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0304] Clause 101. The network node of clause 100, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on signal strengths of the measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than signal strengths of the measurements of the second subset of instances.
[0305] Clause 102. The network node of any of clauses 100 to 101 , wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0306] Clause 103. The network node of any of clauses 100 to 102, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0307] Clause 104. The network node of any of clauses 100 to 103, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
[0308] Clause 105. The network node of clause 104, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
[0309] Clause 106. The network node of any of clauses 100 to 105, wherein the downlink reference signal comprises a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS).
[0310] Clause 107. The network node of any of clauses 100 to 106, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
[0311] Clause 108. The network node of any of clauses 100 to 107, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station. [0312] Clause 109. A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a location server, cause the location server to: transmit, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and receive, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
[0313] Clause 110. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 109, wherein the first set of time resources and the second set of time resources are consecutive time resources or overlapping time resources.
[0314] Clause 111. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 109 to 110, further comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the location server, cause the location server to: determine whether the at least one UE is within a coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report.
[0315] Clause 112. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 111, wherein: the at least one UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report including measurements of the second set of PRS resources, or the at least one UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report not including measurements of the second set of PRS resources.
[0316] Clause 113. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 109 to 112, wherein the network node is configured to beam sweep at least the first set of PRS resources.
[0317] Clause 114. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 109 to 113, further comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the location server, cause the location server to: receive, from the network node, an indication that the repeater is associated with the network node, a coverage area of the repeater, a repeater associated with the UE, a coverage area associated with the UE. [0318] Clause 115. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 114, wherein the indication is received in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
[0319] Clause 116. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 115, wherein the indication is received in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
[0320] Clause 117. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 114 to 116, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
[0321] Clause 118. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 109 to 117, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
[0322] Clause 119. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 109 to 118, further comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the location server, cause the location server to: transmit, to the UE, positioning assistance data for the plurality of PRS resources, wherein the positioning assistance data indicates the first set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the first set of time-domain resources and the second set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the second set of time-domain resources.
[0323] Clause 120. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 109 to 119, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0324] Clause 121. A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a location server, cause the location server to: transmit, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and transmit, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
[0325] Clause 122. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 121, further comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the location server, cause the location server to: transmit, to the first network node, a second message configuring a second donor for the repeater; and transmit, to the first network node, a second PRS configuration for one or more second PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the second donor towards the repeater.
[0326] Clause 123. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 122, wherein the first PRS resource set and the second PRS resource set are non-overlapping in time, frequency, or both.
[0327] Clause 124. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 121 to 123, wherein the PRS configuration is included in a New Radio positioning protocol type A (NRPPa) PRS Configuration Request message.
[0328] Clause 125. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 121 to 124, wherein the first network node is: a base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0329] Clause 126. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 121 to 125, wherein the first donor is: a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the first network node, or a cell supported by the first network node.
[0330] Clause 127. A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a network node, cause the network node to: configure a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; attempt to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; attempt to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and transmit, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0331] Clause 128. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 127, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than the signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances.
[0332] Clause 129. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 127 to 128, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0333] Clause 130. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 127 to 129, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0334] Clause 131. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 127 to 130, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
[0335] Clause 132. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 131, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
[0336] Clause 133. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 127 to 132, wherein the uplink reference signal comprises a sounding reference signal (SRS).
[0337] Clause 134. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 127 to 133, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE.
[0338] Clause 135. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 127 to 134, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0339] Clause 136. A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a network node, cause the network node to: configure a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; receive one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and transmit, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
[0340] Clause 137. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 136, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on signal strengths of the measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than signal strengths of the measurements of the second subset of instances.
[0341] Clause 138. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 136 to 137, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0342] Clause 139. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 136 to 138, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
[0343] Clause 140. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 136 to 139, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
[0344] Clause 141. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 140, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
[0345] Clause 142. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 136 to 141, wherein the downlink reference signal comprises a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS).
[0346] Clause 143. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 136 to 142, wherein the network node is a serving network node of the UE. [0347] Clause 144. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 136 to 143, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
[0348] Those of skill in the art will appreciate that information and signals may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies and techniques. For example, data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, and chips that may be referenced throughout the above description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or particles, optical fields or particles, or any combination thereof.
[0349] Further, those of skill in the art will appreciate that the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, circuits, and algorithm steps described in connection with the aspects disclosed herein may be implemented as electronic hardware, computer software, or combinations of both. To clearly illustrate this interchangeability of hardware and software, various illustrative components, blocks, modules, circuits, and steps have been described above generally in terms of their functionality. Whether such functionality is implemented as hardware or software depends upon the particular application and design constraints imposed on the overall system. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality in varying ways for each particular application, but such implementation decisions should not be interpreted as causing a departure from the scope of the present disclosure.
[0350] The various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in connection with the aspects disclosed herein may be implemented or performed with a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an ASIC, a field-programable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof designed to perform the functions described herein. A general -purpose processor may be a microprocessor, but in the alternative, the processor may be any conventional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine. A processor may also be implemented as a combination of computing devices, for example, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, a plurality of microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core, or any other such configuration. [0351] The methods, sequences and/or algorithms described in connection with the aspects disclosed herein may be embodied directly in hardware, in a software module executed by a processor, or in a combination of the two. A software module may reside in random access memory (RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable ROM (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM), registers, hard disk, a removable disk, a CD-ROM, or any other form of storage medium known in the art. An example storage medium is coupled to the processor such that the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium. In the alternative, the storage medium may be integral to the processor. The processor and the storage medium may reside in an ASIC. The ASIC may reside in a user terminal (e.g., UE). In the alternative, the processor and the storage medium may reside as discrete components in a user terminal.
[0352] In one or more example aspects, the functions described may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented in software, the functions may be stored on or transmitted over as one or more instructions or code on a computer-readable medium. Computer-readable media includes both computer storage media and communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another. A storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by a computer. By way of example, and not limitation, such computer-readable media can comprise RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer. Also, any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium. For example, if the software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using a coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave, then the coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of medium. Disk and disc, as used herein, includes compact disc (CD), laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc (DVD), floppy disk and Blu-ray disc where disks usually reproduce data magnetically, while discs reproduce data optically with lasers. Combinations of the above should also be included within the scope of computer-readable media.
[0353] While the foregoing disclosure shows illustrative aspects of the disclosure, it should be noted that various changes and modifications could be made herein without departing from the scope of the disclosure as defined by the appended claims. For example, the functions, steps and/or actions of the method claims in accordance with the aspects of the disclosure described herein need not be performed in any particular order. Further, no component, function, action, or instruction described or claimed herein should be construed as critical or essential unless explicitly described as such. Furthermore, as used herein, the terms “set,” “group,” and the like are intended to include one or more of the stated elements. Also, as used herein, the terms “has,” “have,” “having,” “comprises,” “comprising,” “includes,” “including,” and the like does not preclude the presence of one or more additional elements (e.g., an element “having” A may also have B). Further, the phrase “based on” is intended to mean “based, at least in part, on” unless explicitly stated otherwise. Also, as used herein, the term “or” is intended to be inclusive when used in a series and may be used interchangeably with “and/or,” unless explicitly stated otherwise (e.g., if used in combination with “either” or “only one of’) or the alternatives are mutually exclusive (e.g., “one or more” should not be interpreted as “one and more”). Furthermore, although components, functions, actions, and instructions may be described or claimed in the singular, the plural is contemplated unless limitation to the singular is explicitly stated. Accordingly, as used herein, the articles “a,” “an,” “the,” and “said” are intended to include one or more of the stated elements. Additionally, as used herein, the terms “at least one” and “one or more” encompass “one” component, function, action, or instruction performing or capable of performing a described or claimed functionality and also “two or more” components, functions, actions, or instructions performing or capable of performing a described or claimed functionality in combination.

Claims

CLAIMS What is claimed is:
1. A location server, comprising: one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a network node, a positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for a plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted by the network node, wherein the PRS configuration indicates a first set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a first set of time-domain resources and a second set of PRS resources of the plurality of PRS resources to be transmitted on a second set of time-domain resources, and wherein the second set of PRS resources is configured to be transmitted towards a repeater associated with the network node; and receive, via the one or more transceivers, from at least one user equipment (UE), a measurement report including measurements of the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both, or a position estimate of the UE determined based on the first set of PRS resources, the second set of PRS resources, or both.
2. The location server of claim 1, wherein the first set of time resources and the second set of time resources are consecutive time resources or overlapping time resources.
3. The location server of claim 1, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to: determine whether the at least one UE is within a coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report.
4. The location server of claim 3, wherein: the at least one UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report including measurements of the second set of PRS resources, or the at least one UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurement report not including measurements of the second set of PRS resources.
5. The location server of claim 1, wherein the network node is configured to beam sweep at least the first set of PRS resources.
6. The location server of claim 1, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to: receive, via the one or more transceivers, from the network node, an indication that the repeater is associated with the network node, a coverage area of the repeater, a repeater associated with the UE, a coverage area associated with the UE.
7. The location server of claim 6, wherein the indication is received in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
8. The location server of claim 7, wherein the indication is received in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
9. The location server of claim 1, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the UE, positioning assistance data for the plurality of PRS resources, wherein the positioning assistance data indicates the first set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the first set of time-domain resources and the second set of PRS resources to be transmitted on the second set of time-domain resources.
10. The location server of claim 1, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
11. A location server, comprising: one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a first network node, a first message configuring a first donor for a repeater; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the first network node, a first positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for one or more first PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the first donor towards the repeater.
12. The location server of claim 11, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to: transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the first network node, a second message configuring a second donor for the repeater; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to the first network node, a second PRS configuration for one or more second PRS resource sets to be transmitted by the second donor towards the repeater.
13. The location server of claim 12, wherein the first PRS resource set and the second PRS resource set are non-overlapping in time, frequency, or both.
14. The location server of claim 11, wherein: the first network node is a base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station, and the first donor is a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the first network node, or a cell supported by the first network node.
15. A network node, compri sing : one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: configure a user equipment (UE) to transmit an uplink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; attempt to obtain measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater; attempt to obtain measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the uplink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
16. The network node of claim 15, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on the signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than the signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances.
86
17. The network node of claim 15, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
18. The network node of claim 15, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
19. The network node of claim 15, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
20. The network node of claim 19, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
21. The network node of claim 15, wherein the uplink reference signal comprises a sounding reference signal (SRS).
22. The network node of claim 15, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
23. A network node, comprising: one or more memories; one or more transceivers; and one or more processors communicatively coupled to the one or more memories and the one or more transceivers, the one or more processors configured to: configure a user equipment (UE) to measure a downlink reference signal over a plurality of time instances; configure a repeater associated with the network node with a set of ON times and a set of OFF times spanning at least the plurality of time instances; receive, via the one or more transceivers, one or more measurement reports from the UE, the one or more measurement reports including measurements of a first subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of ON times of the repeater, measurements of a second subset of instances of the plurality of instances of the downlink reference signal corresponding to the set of OFF times of the repeater, or both; and transmit, via the one or more transceivers, to a location server, an indication of whether the UE is within a coverage area of the repeater, wherein the indication is based on whether the measurements of the first subset of instances were obtained, the measurements of the second subset of instances were obtained, or both.
24. The network node of claim 23, wherein: the measurements of the first subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the first subset of instances, the measurements of the second subset of instances comprise signal strength measurements of the second subset of instances, and the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater based on signal strengths of the measurements of the first subset of instances being greater than signal strengths of the measurements of the second subset of instances.
25. The network node of claim 23, wherein the UE is determined to be outside the coverage area of the repeater based on the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
26. The network node of claim 23, wherein the UE is determined to be within the coverage area of the repeater and a coverage area of the network node based on: the measurements of the first subset of instances being obtained, and the measurements of the second subset of instances being obtained.
27. The network node of claim 23, wherein the indication is transmitted in an enhanced cell identifier (E-CID) Measurement Report message.
28. The network node of claim 27, wherein the indication is transmitted in a Cell Portion Identifier field of the E-CID Measurement Report message.
29. The network node of claim 23, wherein the downlink reference signal comprises a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS).
30. The network node of claim 23, wherein the network node is: a base station, a transmission-reception point (TRP) supported by the base station, a cell supported by the base station, a central unit (CU) of the base station, or a distributed unit (DU) of the base station.
PCT/US2024/014581 2023-03-09 2024-02-06 Resolving ambiguity in cases of repeater-based positioning WO2024186429A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202363489317P 2023-03-09 2023-03-09
US63/489,317 2023-03-09
US18/432,644 US20240306117A1 (en) 2023-03-09 2024-02-05 Resolving ambiguity in cases of repeater-based positioning
US18/432,644 2024-02-05

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024186429A1 true WO2024186429A1 (en) 2024-09-12

Family

ID=90362449

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2024/014581 WO2024186429A1 (en) 2023-03-09 2024-02-06 Resolving ambiguity in cases of repeater-based positioning

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024186429A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113544981A (en) * 2019-03-15 2021-10-22 高通股份有限公司 Positioning with relays
WO2022251759A1 (en) * 2021-05-24 2022-12-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Selective positioning reference signal (prs) muting with repeater
US20220416967A1 (en) * 2021-06-29 2022-12-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Resource allocation for repeater-assisted positioning reference signal (prs) transmission
WO2023278910A1 (en) * 2021-06-29 2023-01-05 Qualcomm Incorporated Reconfigurable intelligent surface (ris)-assisted positioning reference signal (prs) transmission and assistance data

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113544981A (en) * 2019-03-15 2021-10-22 高通股份有限公司 Positioning with relays
WO2022251759A1 (en) * 2021-05-24 2022-12-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Selective positioning reference signal (prs) muting with repeater
US20220416967A1 (en) * 2021-06-29 2022-12-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Resource allocation for repeater-assisted positioning reference signal (prs) transmission
WO2023278910A1 (en) * 2021-06-29 2023-01-05 Qualcomm Incorporated Reconfigurable intelligent surface (ris)-assisted positioning reference signal (prs) transmission and assistance data

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP4128830A1 (en) On demand positioning reference signals and per band deployment aspects
US20240333450A1 (en) Resource allocation for repeater-assisted positioning reference signal (prs) transmission
US20240255603A1 (en) Selective positioning reference signal (prs) muting with repeater
US20240236920A1 (en) Reconfigurable intelligent surface (ris)-assisted positioning reference signal (prs) transmission and assistance data
EP4205466A1 (en) Dynamic bandwidth configuration for positioning reference signal (prs) operation
US20240306117A1 (en) Resolving ambiguity in cases of repeater-based positioning
US20240036146A1 (en) User equipment (ue) handling of delayed sounding reference signal (srs) configuration for downlink-and-uplink-based positioning methods
US20240381141A1 (en) Multiple carrier phase measurements associated with positioning frequency layer and differential carrier phase measurement reporting
US20230413012A1 (en) Measurement of sounding reference signal via uplink relay
WO2024186429A1 (en) Resolving ambiguity in cases of repeater-based positioning
WO2024158458A1 (en) Positioning reference signal (prs) transmission across intra-band contiguous component carriers
WO2024205829A1 (en) Phase difference measurement for carrier phase-based positioning
WO2023215089A1 (en) Reporting positioning error causes during positioning session
WO2024015131A1 (en) Methods for connected intelligent edge, cie, based positioning
WO2024118272A1 (en) Methods and systems for feedback-based decisions in a multi-technology positioning engine
WO2024030188A1 (en) Two-part positioning reference signal (prs)
WO2024210982A1 (en) Unified transmission configuration indicator (tci) for positioning reference signals
WO2024233011A2 (en) Implicit determination rules for positioning reference signal (prs) resource set aggregation linkage
WO2024232965A2 (en) User equipment (ue) measurement reporting configuration for aggregated positioning reference signal (prs) resources
WO2024030172A1 (en) Scheduling restriction interval for positioning reference signal (prs) muting
WO2024030175A1 (en) Reduced-capacity (redcap) frequency stitching
WO2024118268A1 (en) Group delay margins for devices with reference signal frequency hopping
WO2024215382A1 (en) Capability signaling for positioning reference signal bandwidth aggregation across multiple positioning frequency layers
WO2024107509A1 (en) Enhanced cell identity (e-cid) positioning enhancements for multi-connectivity
WO2024163328A2 (en) Core and radio access network signaling for overlap configuration recommendation and selection for sounding reference signals (srs) for positioning

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24710298

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1